Home

1760-UM002B-EN-P, Pico GFX-70 Controllers User Manual

1. l GFX 70 The above topology allows two GFX devices to be run in Pico Link Terminal mode Each GFX device can run with the other devices in Terminal mode Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 28 Commissioning Figure 3 15 Terminal mode in Pico Link as well as via two serial interfaces GFX 70 GFX 70 The above topology is a combination of Pico Link operation and serial interface operation Bear in mind the access rights of the individual Pico Link devices and in the corresponding point to point serial interface Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 PROGRAM STOP Y RUN PARAMETERS SET CLOCK STOP Y RUN PARAMETERS SET CLOCK TERMINAL MODE STATION ID 0 START MODE Commissioning 3 29 ATTENTION Data collision To ensure proper operation the following conditions must be observed The following applies If there is more than one GFX device in Terminal mode each GFX device must access a different Pico Link station A device running in Terminal mode must not access any two devices communicating with each other in Terminal mode If a PC with PicoSoft Pro or a GFX device with a serial interface is in activ
2. 1760 LDFCA Allen Bradley 00 000000000000 Input Voltage 100 240V ac 50 60Hz Power Input 15VA CEG AWG 24 12 Made in Germany Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 18 Inside Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Specifications Appendix A Table A 1 Display Mounting Specifications Specification Front dimensions W x H x D 1760 DU and 1760 DUB 1760 DUB with keys 86 5 mm x 86 5 mm x 21 5 mm 3 41 in x 3 41 in x 0 85 in 1760 DU without keys 86 5 mm x 86 5 mm x 20 mm 3 41 in x 3 41 in x 0 79 in Total dimensions with fixing shaft WxHxD With keys 86 5 mm x 86 5 mm x 43 mm 3 41 in x 3 41 in x 1 69 in Thickness of fixing wall without intermediate DIN rail minimum 1 mm 0 04 in maximum 6 mm 0 24 in Thickness of fixing wall with intermediate DIN rail minimum 1 mm 0 04 in maximum 4 mm 0 16 in Weight 130g 0 287 Ib Mounting Two 22 5 mm 0 886 in holes Display fastened with two fixing rings Maximum tightening torque of the fixing rings 1 2 to 2 Nm Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 2 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table A 2 Protective Membrane Mounting Specifications Specification 1760 NDM Dimensions W x H x D 88 5 mm x 88 5 mm x 22 5 mm 3 49 x 3 49 x 0 99 Weight 25g 0 055 Ib Mounting Is a over t
3. Source range Value of source Destination range Value of marker range destination decimal marker range decimal MB10 42 MB20 42 MB11 27 MB21 27 MB12 179 MB22 179 MB13 205 MB23 205 MB14 253 MB24 253 MB15 17 MB25 17 MB16 4 MB26 4 MB17 47 MB27 47 MB18 11 MB28 11 MB19 193 MB29 193 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the content of MB10 to MB19 is copied to the marker bytes MB20 to MB29 Example Copying of marker blocks definition of a marker range with offset The content of marker bytes MB15 to MB18 is to be copied to marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 62 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range gt I1 MB15 Destination range gt 12 64 Number of bytes gt No 4 Marker MBO1 1 IMPORTANT Destination range Constant 64 Marker MBO1 plus Offset 1 64 65 MB65 Source range Value of source Destination range Value of marker range destination decimal marker range decimal MB15 68 MB65 68 MB16 189 MBE66 189 MB17 203 MB67 203 MB18 3 MB68 3 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the content of MB15 to MB18 is copied to the marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Example Copying of marker blocks definition of a marker range in a different format The value of marker byte MD60 to MD62 is to be copied to MW40 to MW45 Parameters of BTO1 function block Source range gt 11 MD60 Destination
4. t at e Range D The Reset coil resets the timing relay e Range E The Reset coil resets the timing relay The Trigger coil is still activated after the Reset coil has been deactivated and the time is still running Timing Relay Synchronous and Asynchronous Flashing Time value gt I1 Pulse time Time value gt I2 Pause time Synchronous symmetrical flashing gt I1 equal gt 12 Asynchronous flashing gt 11 not equal gt 12 Figure 4 75 Signal diagram of timing relay synchronous and asynchronous flashing 1 trigger coil T EN Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 152 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 VC27 gt I1 gt SH gt SL Qv gt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 e Range A he relay flashes for as long as the Trigger coil is activated R T Range B The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time R T ange C he Reset coil resets the relay Value Limitation Pico GFX 70 provides 32 value limitation function blocks VC01 to VC32 The value limitation function block allows you to limit values You can define an upper and lower limit value The function block will then only output values within these limits Wiring of a Value Limitation Function Block You can integrate a value limitation function blo
5. 01 01 01 ea eE On A bee Range from jump label 1 l R Q 02 IR Q 02 processed 08 08 02 Q 02 02 08 Jump to label 8 Range to jump label 8 skipped Q 02 I 03 T T 02 Q 02 I 03 08 aS aoa Q 01 Tears oe Jump label 8 circuit diagram 08 08 processed from this point on I 12 L D01 T 12 D 01 Master Reset The master reset function block allows you to reset the state of the markers and all outputs to the 0 state with a single command Depending on the operating mode of this function block it is possible to reset the outputs only ot the markers only or both 32 function blocks are available Figure 4 53 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with master reset function block Parameter Display and Parameter Set for the Master Reset Function Block MR16 Master reset function block number 16 Q Reset outputs mode Appears in the parameter display Operating modes e Q Acts on the outputs Q Q S S SN QA01 network station address e M acts on the marker range MD01 to MD48 e ALL acts on Q and M Contacts MRO01Q1 to MR32Q1 NCO2 BCD gt I1 Qv gt Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 123 The contact switches on the marker if the trigger coil MR T has the 1 state Coils MROIT to MR32T trigger coils Memory Requirement of the Data Function Block The master reset function block requires 20 bytes of memor
6. Programming Software and Cable 1760 PICOSOFTPRO 1760 CBL PCO2 1760 PICOPRO PCO2 Display Units 1760 DUB 1760 DU Memory Module 1760 MM3 Power Supply 1606 XLP30E Point to Point Serial Interface Cables 1760 CBL 2M 1760 CBL 5M Cables for Pico Link between Processors 1760 CBL INTO1 1760 CBL INTO3 1760 CBL INTO5 1760 CBL INT300 1760 CONN RJ45 1760 TERM1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Summary of Changes 4 Released April 2004 Released April 2005 Protective Covers 1760 NDM 1760 NDC Mounting Feet 1760 NMF Tools 1492 N90 1492 KWC New Information The following table lists the sections of this manual where new information has been added For this New Information See Added Figure 1 3 Remote Processor Features 1 5 Revised Catalog Number Reference section to include new catalog numbers 1 6 Revised Setting Values section 1 19 In the section Connecting the Expansion Unit added a note that you can 2 16 only connect one expansion 1 0 module to each controller Modified text below Figure 2 28 Temperature sensor brightness sensor 20 2 26 mA sensor Added new catalog numbers to Table 2 47 Pico Expansion I O Modules 2 40 Added Installing the Remote Processor section 2 41 Re arranged the numbered steps within the
7. INFORMATION V Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Pico GFX 70 Program Cycle Chapter 8 Inside Pico GFX 70 In conventional control systems a relay or contactor control processes all the circuit connections in parallel The speed with which a contactor switches is thus dependent on the components used and ranges from 15 to 40 ms for relay pick up and drop out With Pico GFX 70 the circuit diagram is processed with a microprocessor that simulates the contacts and relays of the circuit concerned and thus processes all switching operations considerably faster Depending on its size the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram is processed cyclically every 0 1 to 40 ms During this time Pico GFX 70 passes through six segments in succession How Pico GFX 70 Evaluates the Circuit Diagram Circuit Segment connec 1 2 3 4 5 6 tions In the first four segments Pico GFX 70 evaluates the contact fields in succession Pico GFX 70 checks whether contacts are switched in parallel or in series and saves the switching states of all contact fields In the fifth segment Pico GFX 70 assigns the new switching states to all the coils in one pass The sixth segment is located outside of the circuit diagram Pico GFX 70 uses this to Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 2 Inside Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Evaluating Function Blocks e process the function blocks which are used the outpu
8. Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 10 Commissioning Testing the Circuit Diagram 1 Switch to the main menu and select the STOP RUN menu option PROGRAM POR REN With a tick at RUN or STOP you switch to the RUN or STOP operating PARAMETERS modes SET CLOCK Pico GFX 70 runs in the mode indicated by the tick 2 Press the OK button Pico GFX 70 will change to RUN mode TIP The mode assigned the tick is always active The Status display shows the current mode and the switching states of the inputs and outputs 3 Change to the Status display and press push button actuator S1 Dds weiss Ws s I P MO 14 42 za aie The contacts boxes for inputs I1 and I2 are activated and relay Q1 picks up This is indicated on the numbers which are displayed Power Flow Display The Pico GFX 70 allows you to check circuit connections in RUN mode This means that you can check your circuit diagram via the built in power flow display while it is being processed by the Pico GFX 70 1 Change to the Circuit diagram display and press push button actuator S1 The relay picks up Pico GFX 70 shows the power flow Figure 3 6 Power flow display Inputs 11 and 12 are closed relay 01 has picked up L 1 C 1 RUN visible area 2 Press push button actuator S2 that has been connected as a break contact The circuit connection is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out Publication 1760 UM002B
9. Figure 5 31 Making the value entry element invisible Set value visible Set value invisible Set value entry Invisible Set value entry Invisible QV via I4 Qv 299 1037 299 via I4 Screen 6 Screen 6 shows an example of the Operability tab visibility set as in screen 5 When I3 closes the entry function is disabled Make contact bit logic is selected If the value entry element is disabled you can still select it flashing but Entry mode changing values is disabled If the value entry element is in Entry mode when 3 closes the Pico GFX 70 automatically switches to Selection mode When using break contact bit logic entry is only possible if 13 is actuated The value entry element is made invisible via 14 However it is still operable and values can still be modified Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 30 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 5 32 Value entry element disabled 13 not actuated 13 actuated Set value entry Set value entry disabled disabled QV via I3 QV via I3 249 1037 249 Message Text This screen element can be used to display texts that are stored beforehand in a text table inside the program A text can have a maximum length of 16 characters Additional blanks are added to the displayed text if it is shorter than the element A message text is used for indicating status changes in the process In ord
10. The The marker byte MB and marker word MW number formats are unsigned Circuit Diagram Display In the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram contacts and coils of relays are connected up from left to right from the contact to the coil The circuit diagram is created on a hidden wiring grid containing contact fields coil fields and circuit connections It is then wired up with connections e Insert contacts in the four contact fields The first contact field on the left is automatically connected to the voltage e Insert the relay coil to be controlled together with its function and designation in the coil field The coil designation consists of the coil name coil number and function block from the function designation The coil function defines the method of operation of the coil e Every line in the circuit diagram forms a circuit connection With the Pico GFX 70 up to 256 circuit connections can be wired in a circuit diagram Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 16 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Contact fields 1 to 4 Coil field 5 Circuit connections I 0 1 I 02 pe P01 GT Q 01 Q 01 H YO 1Q1 EHRHHE TTT TT TTT TT TTT Hill TTT TT TTT TT EEHEHE Status line L 1 c y B Number of the ae circuit Connecting lines connection Number of Amount of free thefieldinthe memory in bytes circuit connection e Connections are used to produce
11. The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify the switching function time base or setpoint times and enable the parameter display Table 4 64 Timing Relay Modes Parameter Switch function x On delayed switching X On delayed with random time range I Off delayed switching rd Off delayed with random time range xl On and off delayed g Off delayed with random time range setpoint retriggerable 0 Off delayed with random time range retriggerable xil On and off delayed switching with random time 2 time setpoints n Single pulse switching m Switch with flashing synchronous 2 time setpoint values M Switch with flashing asynchronous 2 time setpoint values Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 141 Table 4 65 Time Range Parameter Time range and setpoint time Resolution S 000 000 Seconds 0 005 to 999 995s for constants and 5ms variable values M S 00 00 Minutes Seconds 00 00 to 99 59 only for constants 1s and variable values H M 00 00 Hours Minutes 00 00 to 99 59 only for constants 1 min and variable values IMPORTANT Minimum time setting 0 005 s 5 ms If a time value is less than the Pico GFX 70 cycle time the elapsed time will only be recognized in the next cycle Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 and gt 12 can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 JA02 termina
12. e Range B The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing e Range C The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact After the Reset coil drops out the relay continues to work normally e Range D The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact when the function block is timing out Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 147 Figure 4 69 Signal diagram of timing relay off delayed with without random switching with without retriggering HAN Ha is gt e Range E The Tigger coil drops out twice The set time t consists of t4 plus tz switch function not retriggerable e Range F The Trigger coil drops out twice The actual time t4 is cleared and the set time t elapses completely retriggerable switch function Timing relay on delayed and off delayed with and without random switching Time value gt I1 On delayed time Time value gt 12 Off delayed time Random switching The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the setpoint value range Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 148 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Figure 4 70 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 1 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 ts1 pick up time t2 drop out time e Range A The relay processes the two times without any interruption e Range B The
13. 10 to 0 C with activated backlight uninterrupted duty 5 C to 50 C 23 F to 122 F Storage transport temperature 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 non condensing 5 to 95 Air pressure operation 795 to 1080 hPa Ambient mechanical conditions Pollution degree Processor Unit inputs outputs 2 Display keypad 3 Degree of protection EN 50178 IEC 60529 VBG4 Processor Unit inputs outputs IP20 Display keypad IP65 Type 3R Type 12R Display keypad with protective cover IP65 Type 3R Type 12R Display keypad with protective membrane IP65 NEMA Type 4X type 3R rain tight and Type 12 dust tight Oscillations IEC 60068 2 6 Constant amplitude 0 15 mm 10 to 57 Hz Constant acceleration 2g 57 to 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60068 2 27 semi sinusoidal 15 g 11 ms 18 shocks Drop IEC 60068 2 31 50 mm drop height Free fall when packaged IEC 60068 2 32 ary m Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 6 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table A 6 General Ambient Conditions Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Electrostatic discharge ESD IEC EN 61000 4 2 severity level 3 Air discharge 8 kV Contact discharge 6 kV Electromagnetic fields RFI 10 V m IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radio interference suppression EN 55011 B IEC 61000 6 1 2 3 4 limit class Bu
14. 1760 LDFC and 1760 LDFCA 8 Bus length transmission speed 6m 1 000k Baud 25m 500k Baud 40m 250k Baud 125m 125k Baud 300m 50k Baud 700m 20k Baud 1000m 10k Baud Electrical isolation To power supply inputs outputs expansion 1 0 PC interface memory module Yes Bus termination see accessories Yes First and last station Plug connector see accessories 8 poles RJ45 Cable cross sections with cable lengths and cable resistance m Cross section up to 1000 lt 16 mQ m 1 5 mm 16 AWG Cross section up to 600 lt 26 mQ m 0 75 mm to 0 8 mm 18 AWG Cross section up to 400 lt 40 mQ m 0 5 mm to 0 6 mm 20 19 AWG Cross section up to 250 lt 60 mQ2 m 0 34 mm to 0 5 mm 22 21 20 AWG Cross section up to 175 lt 70 mQ m 0 25 mm to 0 34 mm 23 22 AWG Cross section up to 40 lt 140 mQ2 m 0 13 mm 26 AWG 1 Bus lengths above 40 m can only be achieved with cables with reinforced cross section and connection adapter Specifications A 17 List of the Function Blocks Table A 18 Function Block Definitions Element Meaning of abbreviation Function block designation Page A Analog comparator Analog comparator threshold value 4 40 switch AR Arithmetic Arithmetic 4 43 BC block compare Data block comparison 4 47 BT block transfer Data bloc
15. 3 2 Commissioning Operating Modes Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 Press OK to confirm your choice and press ESC to exit the menu GFX will then switch to the Status display IMPORTANT You can change the language setting at a later date if you wish See Changing the Menu Language on page 7 8 If you do not set the language the Pico GFX 70 will display this menu every time you switch on and wait for you to select a language Pico GFX 70 operating modes RUN STOP and TERMINAL MODE In RUN mode the GFX continuously processes a stored program until you select STOP disconnect the power supply or switch to TERMINAL MODE The program parameters and the GFX settings are retained in the event of a power failure All you will have to do is reset the real time clock after the back up time has elapsed Circuit diagram entry is only possible in STOP mode IMPORTANT In RUN mode the processor will immediately run the program saved in the unit when the power supply is switched on This will not happen if STOP or TERMINAL mode was set as startup mode In RUN mode outputs are activated according to the switch logic involved The following applies to devices without display keypad e Memory module containing a valid circuit diagram must be fitted e Device must be switched on If the device has no program the program stored on the memory module is loaded automatically and the device immediately starts ru
16. Allen Bradley Pico GFX 70 Controllers Bulletin 1760 User Manual a z or _ E aes PEE e eee Rockwell Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in
17. EEEE FEH HUAI gt I1 ERPEEEEEEEE gt I2 EPRRETEEEEEE t Qv gt EEEEEEEEEEE Variable operand for inputs Variable operand for outputs 1 Go to the FUNCTION RELAYS menu 2 Press the OK button The following display appears if no function blocks are present The cursor flashes 3 Press the OK button Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 30 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 ARO1 L 001 B 7988 ARO1 ADD CP10 T 18 X L 001 B 6488 T 01 X M S gt I1 20 30 gt I2 QV gt MD96 L 001 B 7808 The editor for inputting a function block is displayed 4 Select the desired function block and number The functions of the individual function blocks are explained in the individual function block descriptions on the following pages This display appears if there are function blocks present The function blocks are created in the sequence in which they were edited Calling up Function Blocks from the Circuit Diagram If you enter a function block parameter from the circuit diagram you will jump from the circuit diagram editor to the function block editor automatically Once you have assigned the parameters you will return to the position where you left the circuit diagram with Save or Cancel The operation is carried out in the same way as with circuit diagram operation Example timing relay function block Fun
18. ESC Co b ALT Chapter 4 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 This chapter describes all the functions available with Pico GFX 70 Buttons for Drawing Circuit Diagrams and Function Block Usage DEL Delete circuit connection contact relay or empty line in the circuit diagram ALT Toggle between break and make contact Connect contacts and relays Add circuit connections Cursor buttons up down change values left right change place Cursor buttons set as P buttons left Input P1 right Input P3 up Input P2 down Input P4 OK Change add contact relay Save setting ESC Undo setting from previous OK Exit current display or menu Terminal mode on off Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 2 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Operating Principles The cursor buttons in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram perform three functions The current mode is indicated by the appearance of the flashing cursor e Move e Entering e Connect In Move mode you can the up down left and right arrows buttons to move the cursor around the circuit diagram to select a circuit connection contact or relay coil Use OK to switch to Entry mode so that you can enter or change a value at the current cursor position If you press ESC in Entry mode Pico GFX 70 will undo the most recent changes Press ALT to switch to Connect mode for wiring contacts and relays Pr
19. ID 05 ID 06 ID 07 ID 08 coo NSN oy A wy N Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 14 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 f ee aai IMPORTANT Ifa station does not send a sign of life signal station not available Pico Link interrupted the respective diagnostics contact ID is activated ATTENTION If the states of the inputs outputs or data are required by a station without fail the respective diagnostics contact should be evaluated and the information applied in accordance with its respective application gt If the respective diagnostics contacts are not evaluated it may cause faults in your application IMPORTANT The data to be read from a faulty station is set to 0 after the fault is detected Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 15 Network Transmission Security The Pico Link is a CAN based network CAN is used in cars and commercial vehicles in all areas The same fault recognition capability with data transfer applies as with CAN A BOSCH study relating to undiscovered and corrupt messages determined the following The probability of non discovery of a corrupted message residual error probability is lt 1010 message error rate The message error rate depends on e Bus loading e Telegram length e Malfunction frequency e Number of stations Example Network with e 500 kBa
20. SM 01 I 01 M 01 s Q 01 P 01 M 01 IMPORTANT The P buttons are only detected as switches in the Status menu I1123456789 MO 14 55 Q 2 6 8 P2 RUN Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 27 The Status menu display shows whether the P buttons are used in the circuit diagram Displayed on the Status display e P button function wired and active e P2 button function wired active and P2 button up arrow key pressed e P button function wired and not active e Empty field P buttons not used Checking the Circuit Diagram Pico GFX 70 contains a built in measuring device enabling you to monitor the switching states of contacts relays and function block coils during operation 1 Create the small parallel circuit below and save it Figure 4 13 Parallel circuit 2 Switch Pico GFX 70 to RUN mode via the main menu 3 Return to the circuit diagram display You are now unable to edit the circuit diagram IMPORTANT If you switch to the circuit diagram display and are unable to modify a circuit diagram first check whether Pico GFX 70 is in STOP mode The circuit diagram display performs two functions depending on the mode Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 28 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 e STOP Creation of the circuit diagram e RUN Power flow display 4 Switch on I3 Figure 4 14 Power flow dis
21. The program consists of three screens that you can select via the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 The purpose of this program is to display several messages in one message text element The Visibility and Display change tabs are also covered The clock pulse T01 activates counter C01 This counts up to 7 and then resets itself automatically This therefore produces a continuous loop that activates the individual messages Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Six messages in one Message text module_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 The first screen contains a message text element with six message texts e Status value 1 Message text These e Status value 2 Message text are six e Status value 3 Message text message texts e Status value 4 Message text in one e Status value 5 Message text message text p e Status value 6 Message text element It can be seen that the messages can be moved within the entry field Screen 2 Screen 2 is almost the same as screen 1 apart from one addition which enables the message text element to be made invisible via I1 make contact bit logic The use of the break contact bit logic would make the element visible Figure 5 41 Make message text invisible 11 not actuated 11 actuated Invisible via Invisible via Ii Ii Message texts
22. This will open the menu for setting the time 2 Select SET CLOCK 3 Set the values for day time month and year 4 Press the OK button to access the Entry mode Use the left right arrow keys to move between the parameters Use the up down arrow keys to change the value OK Save day and time ESC Retain previous setting 5 Press ESC to leave the time setting display Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 12 Pico GFX 70 Settings Changing Between The devices are fitted with a real time clock The clock has various possibilities for changing the DST setting These are subject to different legal requirements Winter Summer time DST 4e EU GB and USA IMPORTANT The time change algorithm only applies to the northern hemisphere e NONE no daylight saving time setting e MANUAL a user defined date for the DST change e EU date defined by the European Union Commences last Sunday in March Ends last Sunday in October GB date defined in Great Britain Commences last Sunday in March Ends fourth Sunday in October e US date defined in the United States of America Commences first Sunday in April Ends last Sunday in October The following applies to all DST variants e Winter time h Summer time On the day of conversion the clock moves forward one hour at 2 00 to 3 00 e Summer time h Winter time On the day of conversion the clock moves back one hour at 3 00 to 2 00 1
23. Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 129 Example 6 Input value gt 11 21474836474 BCD binary value 01111111111111111111111111111111 Hexadecimal value 0111 111111111111 1111111111111111 Decimal value QV gt 161061273 IMPORTANT Values greater than 9999999 are output as 161061273 Values less than 9 999999 are output as 161061273 The working range of the function block has been exceeded Operating Hours Counter Pico GFX 70 provides 4 independent operating hours counters The counter states are retained even when the device is switched off As long as the enable coil of the operating hours counter is active Pico GFX 70 counts the hours in minute cycles Figure 4 55 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with operating hours counter I 10 OTO1EN M 42 OTO1RE OU0IQI a soe e senna eee Q 01 Parameter display and parameter set for the operating hours counter function block OT04 Operating hours counter number 04 Appears in the parameter display gt I Upper threshold value in hours QV gt Actual value of the operating hours counter Contacts OT01Q1 to OT04Q1 The contact switches when the upper threshold value has been reached greater than or equal to Coils e OTOLEN to OT04EN enable coil e OTOLRE to OTO4RE reset coil Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 130 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March
24. 1MD00 11 Use the up arrow button to select the start of the READ marker range WRITE 1MD00 1MD00 READ IMD1I IMD14 12 Use the right arrow button to enter the upper limit of the READ range WRITE 1MD00 1MD00 13 Use the up arrow button to select the value 14 Confirm the entry with the OK button READ impifi imp14 WRITE 1MD00 1MD00 READ IMDI1 IMD14 15 Use the down arrow button to enter the WRITE range WRITE iMDoplg IMD00 16 Enter the WRITE range READ 1MD11 IMD14 17 Press ESC to leave the entry menu WRITE IMD1 I IMD17 The Serial Interface has now been set No COM settings are required at BAUDRATE 193008 the remote station Serial Interface v REMOTE MARKER 18 Press ESC to return to the Status display 112 4 67 ICOM P The entry in the second COM line indicates that the COM connection is FR 02 02 ST VOIAS STOP active Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Commissioning 3 25 Terminal Mode The GFX device also supports the TERMINAL MODE operating mode This allows you to remotely control other devices This is especially useful if the other device is located in an inaccessible place Terminal mode can also be used to show the menus and displays of devices that do not have their own display or keypad Terminal mode can be used both with the serial interface and in the Pico Link The s
25. 2 Using a screwdriver push on the terminal latch 3 Insert each wire into its designated terminal on the interface connector 4 Replace the interface cover Plug the other end of the cable into the Pico controller or I O module Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 44 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Switching On Setting the Menu Language ENGLISH v DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ESPANOL Chapter 3 Commissioning Before startup check whether the power supply inputs outputs the serial interface and the Pico Link cable are properly connected e 24V dc version Terminal 24V 24V voltage Terminal OV OV voltage Terminals I1 to 112 R1 to R12 Actuation via 24V e 230V ac version Terminal L Phase conductor L Terminal N Neutral conductor N Terminals R1 to R12 Actuation via phase conductor L If you have already integrated devices into a system secure any parts of the system connected to the working area to prevent access and ensure that no one can be injured if for example motors start up unexpectedly When you switch on the Pico GFX 70 for the first time you will be asked to select the menu language 1 Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the language required English German French Spanish Italian Portuguese Dutch Swedish Polish Turkish Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005
26. CONFIGURE CONFIGURATION IN PROGRESS ERR ID CONFLICT OVERWRITE CONFIGURATION Commissioning 3 17 Configuring a Pico Link Network The Pico Link network can only be configured from station 1 Requirement All stations are correctly connected to the network and the termination resistors have been connected All stations have a power supply and are in STOP mode The POW LED is permanently lit The NET LED is permanently lit IMPORTANT If the connected stations are configured all stations automatically switch to the STOP mode 1 Proceed to the CONFIGURE menu item and press the OK button You will be asked to acknowledge whether you want to configure the system 2 Press the OK button The message on the left appears All NET LEDs on the stations which are assigned station numbers higher than 1 2 to 8 switch to the OFF state of the Pico Link As soon as the configuration has been successfully completed the NET LEDs on all stations flash The Pico Link network is ready for operation IMPORTANT An error message will appear if a station is assigned a station address which does not correspond to the physical location in the station list If you want to overwrite the station address press the OK button The configuration can be aborted by pressing the ESC button Changing the Pico Link Configuration The configuration of the Pico Link network can be modified at any t
27. Ensure that the correct torque is used If the tightening torque is too low or high this may impair the seal Use the combination box spanner with the designation M22 MS Removing the Display Keypad Front Mounting Unscrew the fixing element and remove the display keypad Mounting the Processor Unit If you wish to add expansion units to the processor unit the DIN rail must be fitted beforehand Fitting the DIN Rail Ensure that the cutout of the DIN rail was prepared for the fixing shafts according to the specified dimensions Figure 2 11 DIN rail with cutout Installation 2 9 IMPORTANT The two fixing shafts of the display keypad are designed for a 2 space unit expansion device If you wish to fit wider expansion units the DIN rail must be supported at a third support point This third support point should be located in the area 216 mm from the end of the device It should not be possible to twist the DIN rail The fixing shafts of the display keypad are designed for mounting the expansion units Other devices such as A contactors must not be mounted on this DIN rail Attach the expansion unit before fitting the DIN rail Figure 2 12 Fitting the DIN rail KS 1 Fit the DIN rail in the groove using the slide catch of the processor unit and the expansion unit 2 Turn the DIN rail tow
28. Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of marker ranges direct Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB10 Block 2 at MB40 Each block is 10 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 MB10 Comparison range 2 gt 12 MB40 Number of bytes gt No 10 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 50 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 1 range 1 decimal 2 range 2 decimal MB10 39 MB40 39 MB11 56 MB41 56 MB12 88 MB42 88 MB13 57 MB43 57 MB14 23 MB44 23 MB15 55 MB45 55 MB16 34 MB46 34 MB17 49 MB47 49 MB18 94 MB48 94 MB19 213 MB49 213 The comparison result of the function block BC01 is BCO1EQ 1 the data block ranges have the same content Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of a marker range with offset Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB15 Block 2 at MB65 Each block is 4 bytes long Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 MB15 Comparison range 2 gt 12 64 Number of bytes gt No 4 Marker MB01 1 IMPORTANT Comparison range 2 Constant 64 MBO01 plus Offset 1 64 65 MB65 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 51 Comparison range Value of marker Comparison range Value of marker 1 range 1 decimal 2 range 2 decimal Ma5 ooo de Mmes e MB16 62 MB66 62 MB17 102 MB67 102 MB18 65 MB68 57
29. In RUN mode the function blocks are processed according to the circuit diagram and the results are updated accordingly Examples Timing relay function block with contacts and coils Time switch function block with contacts Visualization Screens Visualization screens are the sections of programs containing the display and operator functions Relays Relays are switching devices which are electronically simulated in Pico GFX 70 They actuate their contacts according to their designated function A relay consists of a coil and at least one contact Contacts You modify the current flow with the contacts in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram Contacts such as make contacts carry a 1 signal when closed and 0 when open Every contact in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram can be defined as either a make contact or a break contact Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 4 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Coils Coils are the actuating mechanisms of relays In RUN mode the results of the wiring are sent to the coils which switch on or off accordingly Coils can have seven different coil functions Table 4 1 Usable Contacts Contact 1 Make contact open in release position Pico GFX 70 display l Q M A Other contacts a Table i Break contact closed in release position iiq m a Other contacts a Table Pico GFX 70 works with different contacts whi
30. L 1 C 2 RUN visible area Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Commissioning 3 13 Deleting the Circuit Diagram 1 Switch the Pico GFX 70 to STOP mode IMPORTANT Pico GFX 70 must be in STOP mode in order to extend delete or modify the circuit diagram 2 Use PROGRAM to switch from the main menu to the next menu level 3 Select DELETE PROGRAM PROGRAM DELETE PROGRAM The Pico GFX 70 will display the prompt DELETE 4 Press OK to delete the program or ESC to cancel 5 Press ESC to return to the Status display Fast Circuit Diagram Entry You can create a circuit diagram in several ways The first option is to enter the elements in the circuit and then to wire all the elements together The other option is to use the enhanced operator guidance of Pico GFX 70 and create the circuit diagram in one go from the first contact through to the last coil If you use the first option you will have to select some of the elements in order to create and connect up your circuit diagram The second faster option is what you learned in the example In this case you create the entire circuit connection from left to right Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 14 Commissioning Configuring a Pico Link If you want to work with the Pico Link network and communicate with several Network stations the network must be configured first Proceed as follows 1 Connect all netwo
31. MB24 123 MB25 123 MB26 123 MB27 123 MB28 123 MB29 123 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the value 123 is present in the marker bytes MB20 to MB29 Example Initial is at ion of marker blocks definition of a range with offset The content of marker byte MB15 is to be transferred to marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 58 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range gt I1 MB15 Destination range gt 12 64 Number of bytes gt No 4 Marker MBO1 1 IMPORTANT Destination range Constant 64 Marker MBO1 plus Offset 1 64 65 MB65 Source range Value of source Destination range Value of marker range destination decimal marker range decimal MB15 45 MB65 45 MB66 45 MB67 45 MB68 45 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the value 45 is present in the marker bytes MB65 to MB68 Example Initial is at ion of marker blocks definition of a range in a different format The value of marker byte MB60 is to be transferred to MD80 and MD81 Parameters of BT01 function block Source range gt 11 MB60 Destination range gt 12 MD80 Number of bytes gt gt No 8 MEIA The transfer is in byte format MD80 has 4 bytes and MD81 has 4 bytes which means that lt no has the value 8 Comparison range 1 MB60 Value of marker range 1 decima
32. Push button illumination LED Number Color Green Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 8 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table A 8 Power Supply Specifications for DC Processors Specification 1760 LDF and 1760 LDFC Rated voltage Rated value 24V dc 20 15 Permissible range 20 4V dc to 28 8V dc Residual ripple D Input current For 24V dc 1760 LDF normally 125 mA For 24V dc 1760 LDF 1760 DU 250 mA normally For 24V dc 1760 LDF 1760 DU 270 mA 1760 1 normally Voltage dips IEC EN 61131 2 10 ms Heat dissipation For 24V dc 1760 LDF normally 3W For 24V dc 1760 LDF 1760 DU 6W normally For 24V de 1760 LDF 1760 DU 6 5W 1760 1 normally Table A 9 Processor Unit Real Time Clock Timing Relay Memory Backup accuracy of real time clock see graph 200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 7 18 19 20 Accuracy of the real time clock 5 seconds day 0 5 hour year Specifications A 9 Table A 9 Processor Unit Real Time Clock Timing Relay Memory Repetition accuracy of timing relays Accuracy of timing relay from value 0 02 Resolution Range s 5 ms Ra
33. Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 37 Button Editor Screen 3 Screen 3 is almost the same as screen 1 apart from one addition by which the actuation of I1 causes the first message text element to flash and the second message text element to be inverted Figure 5 42 Making message text flash or inverted Display Display change via I1 change via I1 Message texts Message texts All buttons of the Pico GFX 70 can be assigned in the button editor of the PicoSoft Pro with appropriate functions which overwrite the basic button functions Carry out the following steps to associate the buttons of the Pico GFX 70 Select an Operable Screen Element e Display Backlight e Screen Change e Password Logout e Set Variable to Fixed Value e Increment Variable e Decrement Variable e Changeover Relay Select an Operable Screen Element If a screen with a value entry is present you can jump to these value entry elements directly The value entry element is in Entry mode so that you can change the value directly Display Backlight The brightness of the display backlight can be adjusted in stages Screen Change This function enables the operator to change to other saved screens during operation If the operator is to be able to move between several screens using a Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 38 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 button function you must a
34. Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table 4 6 Composition of the markers Applies to Left most Right least MD MW significant bit significant bit MB M byte word byte word 16 bit MW8 MW7 8 bit MB16 MB15 MB14 MB13 32 bit MD5 16 bit MW10 MW9 8 bit MB20 MB19 MB18 MB17 32 bit MD23 16 bit MW46 MW45 8 bit MB92 MB91 MB90 MB89 32 bit MD24 16 bit MW48 MW47 8 bit MB96 MB95 MB94 MB93 32 bit MD25 16 bit MW50 MW49 32 bit MD26 16 bit MW52 MW51 32 bit MD48 16 bit MW96 MW95 32 bit MD49 32 bit MD50 32 bit MD95 32 bit MD96 IMPORTANT Only write the markers once Marker double words always contain all data formats When several write accesses to MD MW MB or M within an MD are made it is the last write operation that is retained This also applies if you are writing markers from a visualization screen Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 15 Number Formats Pico GFX 70 makes computations with a signed 31 bit value The value range is 2147483648 to 2147483 647 With a 31 bit value the 32nd bit is the sign bit Bit 32 state 0 means a positive number Example 0000 000000000000 000001000001 0010pin 4 2pex 10424ec Bit 32 1 means a negative number Example 11111111111111111101110010101110 bin FFFFDCAER 9 0424ec
35. c 01c is the counter coil of the counter 01 function block Figure 4 81 Pico GFX 70 wiring and circuit diagram I 05 c oic I 06 C 01RE C 01 T 01EN T 01Q1 L Q 01 2 Keep the cursor on the number 3 Press the OK button IMPORTANT If the cursor is on the contact number Pico GFX 70 will call up the parameter display when you press OK The first part of the parameter set of a counter is displayed c o1 TRH RLO 4 Move the cursor down over the character to the value input behind gt SL gt SH gt SV gt sH means function block input upper counter setpoint value The character means that the parameters of this timing relay can be modified using the PARAMETERS menu 5 Change the upper counter setpoint to 10 Use the left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor onto the tens digit Use the up and down arrow buttons to modify the value of the digit 6 Press OK to save the value and ESC to return to the circuit diagram IMPORTANT Pico GFX 70 has specific parameter displays for the function blocks The meaning of these parameters is explained under each function block type 7 Enter the circuit diagram up to contact T 01 of the timing relay Set the parameters for T 01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Toit S gt I1 002 000 gt I2 002 000 Qv
36. e 1760 PICOSOFTPRO PicoSoft Pro Programming Software 1760 CBL PCO2 ae Programming Cable PC to Processor ublication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Overview 1 7 Table 1 1 Pico GFX 70 Catalog Number Listing Catalog Number Description Pieces per Package 1760 PICOPRO PCO2 PicoSoft Pro Software and Cable Kit 1 Display Units 1760 DUB Display Unit with Push buttons 1760 DU Display Unit without Push buttons Memory Module 1760 MM3 256K Memory Module Power Supply 1606 XLP30E DC Power Supply Point to Point Serial Interface Cables 1760 CBL 2M Point to Point Serial Interface Cable 2m 6 6 ft 1760 CBL 5M Point to Point Serial Interface Cable 5m 16 4 ft Cables for Pico Link between Processors 1760 CBL INTO1 Pico Link Cable 0 3m 1 ft 5 1760 CBL INTO3 Pico Link Cable 0 8m 2 6 ft 3 1760 CBL INTO5 Pico Link Cable 1 5 m 5 ft 2 1760 CBL INT300 Pico Link Cable non terminated 100m 300 ft 1 1760 CONN RJ45 Connectors for Pico Link Cable 2 1760 TERM1 Network Termination Resistor 2 Protective Covers 1760 NDM Membrane Protect Display 1 1760 NDC Cover Protect Display 1 Mounting Feet 1760 NMF Mounting Feet for panel mounting processors and I O modules 8 Tools 1492 N90 Screwdriver 5 1492 KWC Wire Cutter 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 8 Overview Pico GFX 70 Operati
37. system involving several spatially separated elements A via the Pico Link it must be ensured that REMOTE RUN is not activated Otherwise unwanted machine or system starts may occur during commissioning The associated events depend on the machines or systems involved REMOTE RUN factory default setting Input Output Device REMOTE 10 Configuration All devices are factory set for operation as input and output devices This has the advantage that devices can be used immediately as I O devices regardless of whether they have a display or not You only need to assign the station number This can be implemented via PicoSoft Pro or on a Station 1 with a display If you want to assign a device as an intelligent station on the network the REMOTE IO should be deactivated Figure 6 4 Remote 10 deactivated REMOTE IO Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 11 The standard settings for the input and output devices are SEND IO v REMOTE RUN v REMOTE IO v Station number Pico Link ID and baud rate can be specified via station 1 Station Message Types The Pico Link network recognizes various message types They are Output data of station 1 Q S which is sent to stations without programs e Network outputs and inputs sent and received between stations with programs SN RN e Data sent and received via the network between stations with programs PT and GT function bloc
38. terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output ev gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 103 Value Range for Inputs and Outputs Value range Resolution unit gt l1 Input value of the function 32 768 to 32767 block gt TG Recovery time Ty 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt KP Proportional gain Kp 0 to 65535 in QV gt Output value 32 768 to 32767 Example Value at input Value processed in the function block gt TG Recovery time T 250 25s gt KP Proportional gain Kp 1500 15 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil FTO1EN to FT32EN function block enable Memory Requirement of the FT Function Block The FT function block requires 56 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the Signal Smoothing Filter Function Block IMPORTANT The signal smoothing filter must be enabled so that it can work Coil FT EN is active If coil FT EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero If the function block is called for the first time the output value is initialized with the input value when the device is started or after
39. that module works correctly ensure that the polarity of each terminal is correct Cable Protection Provide cable protection F1 for at least 1A slow IMPORTANT When the expansion I O or the GFX is switched on for the first time its power supply circuit behaves like a capacitor Use a suitable device for switching on the power supply and do not use any Reed relay contacts or proximity switches Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 20 Installation Connecting the Inputs Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The inputs switch electronically Once you have connected a contact via an input terminal you can reuse it as a contact in your Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram as often as you like Figure 2 20 Connecting the inputs L 24V i a 1 N n1 OV Ii Ii Connect contacts such as push button actuators or switches to the input terminals Connecting AC Inputs ATTENTION Connect the inputs to the same line as the power feed in accordance with the VDE IEC UL and CSA safety regulations Otherwise the module will not detect the switching level and may be damaged or destroyed by overvoltage Installation 2 21 Figure 2 21 1760 IA12XOW6I Expansion unit E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 RI R10 R11 R12 N 100 240 V Connect the inputs for example to push button actuators switches or relay contactor contacts Input signal voltage range e OF
40. 01 I 16 S M16 M 16 Q 04 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 8 Inside Pico GFX 70 Expanding Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The above circuit operates as described in example 1 The signal light is triggered at Q4 for additional overload monitoring If Q4 has an overload it would pulse Example 3 Automatic Reset of Error Signal Figure 8 7 Automatic reset of error signal I 01 M 16 Q 01 I 16 SM 16 M 16 T 08EN T 08 RM 16 M 16 L Q 04 The above circuit diagram functions in the same way as Example 2 In addition the marker M16 is reset every 60 seconds by timing relay T08 on delayed 60 s Should 116 remain at 1 M16 will continue to be set Q1 is set briefly to 1 until 116 switches off again You can expand Pico GFX 70 using the 1760 IA12XOW6OI and 1760 IB12XOB8 expansion modules Install the units and connect the inputs and outputs as described see Connecting the Expansion Unit on page 2 16 You process the inputs of the expansion devices as contacts in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram in the same way as you process the inputs of the basic unit The input contacts are assigned the operand designations R1 to R12 R15 and R16 are the group fault inputs of the transistor expansion uni
41. 2 contains four bit display elements These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A make contact bit logic is selected for setting the bit display elements to the state of the corresponding outputs on off The bit display is overlaid partly with static texts Figure 5 4 Bit display with overlaid static text Bit Logic Bit Logic Make contact Make contact Screen 3 Screen 3 illustrates the possible uses of the Visibility tab for the bit display In this screen a bit display element has been enlarged to the full size of the screen It is activated via the Boolean operand Q1 with a make contact bit logic so that the bit display element takes on the state of the output Q1 on off Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 11 The bit display is made invisible via the Boolean operand Q3 A make contact bit logic is also used here so that invisibility is activated for as long as Q3 in the On state When the Reset pulse is present only the frame of the bitmap is visible state of the bitmap is off bitmap is visible The display is overlaid partly with static text Figure 5 5 Bit display visible invisible Bits invisible if Q3 active if Q3 active Screen 4 Screen 4 illustrates the activation of the bit display negated with overlaid static text exclusively via the associated variable This screen contains four bit display elements
42. 26 Serial Interface 6 16 Activation 6 19 Baud rate 6 19 Configuration 6 18 Data access 6 17 8 2 Operating principle 6 20 Sign of life detection 6 20 Serial interface 2 38 Set 4 35 Setpoint potentiometer 2 26 Setpoints 2 33 4 39 7 10 Setting LCD backlight 7 20 Setting LCD contrast 7 20 Setting the LCD 7 20 Setting the time 7 11 Short circuit 2 31 8 7 Monitoring with 1760 IB12X0B8 8 7 Startup behaviour 7 16 7 18 After the circuit diagram is deleted 7 17 Basic setting 7 17 7 19 7 20 7 21 Possible faults 7 18 Setting 7 16 With upload download to module or PC 7 17 Station Active 6 16 Remote 6 16 Status image register 8 2 Suppressing contact bounce 8 5 Switching contact 4 21 Change 4 18 Contact name 4 18 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 Index Contact number 4 18 Cursor buttons 4 26 Deleting 4 21 Entering 3 7 4 18 Invert 3 8 Overview 4 3 System menu Selection 1 9 T Temperature sensor connection 2 26 Terminal mode 3 2 Tightening torque 2 16 Time switch 24 hour switching 4 111 Overnight switching 4 109 Power failure 4 110 Switching at the weekend 4 109 Switching on working days 4 108 Time overlaps 4 110 Timing relay Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 On delayed 4 134 4 143 Operating modes 4 140 Wiring 4 139 Tool 2 16 Tool for cage clamp terminals 2 16 Two wire proximity switches 2 22 V Visualization data Load 8 2 Ww Weekday setting 7 11 Wiring Backward
43. 4 27 Circuit connections 4 15 Coil field 4 15 Contact fields 4 15 Deleting 3 13 Display 3 6 4 15 Fast entry 3 13 Grid 3 6 4 15 Internal processing 8 1 Load 8 15 Operating buttons 4 2 Overview 4 15 Saving 8 13 8 15 Testing 3 10 4 27 Wiring 3 8 4 21 Coil field 4 15 Coil function Contactor 4 34 Index Impulse relay 4 34 Latching relay 4 35 Overview 4 33 common techniques used in this manual P 1 Connecting the brightness sensor 2 26 Connecting transistor outputs 2 30 Connection 20 mA sensor 2 26 Analog inputs 2 25 Analog output 2 32 Brightness sensor 2 26 Contactors relays 2 28 Frequency generator 2 27 GFX DC inputs 2 23 High speed counters 2 27 Incremental encoder 2 27 Outputs 2 28 Proximity switch 2 23 Pushbutton actuators switches 2 21 2 23 Relay outputs 2 28 Serial interface 2 38 Setpoint potentiometer 2 26 Temperature sensor 2 26 Transistor outputs 2 30 Connection cross sections GFX cables 2 16 Screw terminals 2 16 Contact fields 4 15 Counter relay 4 68 4 85 Parameters 4 76 4 80 4 86 Counters High speed 2 27 4 79 High speed incremental encoder 4 85 Cursor display 1 18 4 2 Cycle 8 1 D Data consistency 6 20 DC power supply for the GFX 2 18 Debounce Setting 7 14 Delay times 8 5 Input and output 8 5 Deleting retentive actual values 7 24 Device version 8 17 Dimensions A 1 Display 1 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 Index E Expanding 2 40
44. 86 5 e H Figure A 2 Dimensions of the 1760 NDM protective membrane 88 5 D 88 5 a2 Figure A 3 Dimensions of the 1760 NDC protective cover 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 4 Specifications Figure A 4 Dimensions of the 1760 LDF processor units 16 25 75 a 16 25 it Lal Figure A 5 Dimensions of the 1760 1 1 0 modules 90 it a 88 1 a gt 19 25 Figure A 6 Dimensions of the 1760 RM Remote Processor modules 176 RM ioe a eee ai eee c yo F F S Sl Se os Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 45 1760 DU 20 5 0 81 27 5 1 08 and 176 RM mi e 43 2 1 7 Table A 6 General Ambient Conditions Climatic conditions Specifications A 5 damp heat constant to IEC 60068 2 78 cyclical to IEC 600618 2 30 cold to IEC 60068 2 1 heat to IEC 60068 2 2 Ambient temperature Installed horizontally vertically 25 C to 55 C 13 F to 131 F Condensation processor unit inputs outputs Prevent condensation with suitable measures Display legibility
45. BIN Convert decimal value to BCD coded values Number Range Value Number system 161061273 to 161061273 BCD 9999999 to 9999999 Decimal Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 BCD code 0001 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 125 Decimal value 1 oj CO N Dm of A wy N 1010 to 1111 Not permissible 10000 10 10001 IMPORTANT 11 The BCD code only allows the number range Opex to Ipex The number range Apex to Fhex cannot be represented The NC function block converts the impermissible range to 9 Inputs The function block input gt 11 can be assigned the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 JA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 126 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Actual Value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil NCO1EN to NC32EN enable coil Memory Requirement of the Numerical Converter The numerical converter function block requires 32 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input
46. Boolean operand 11 Right numerical value Display of timing relay value T08 11 actuated the numerical value is inverted as the external trigger is set for inverted display via Boolean operand 11 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 24 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Figure 5 25 External trigger Display change 11 external trigger 3 37s 3 37s Screen 7 Screen 7 shows a simple example of the display change using an internal limit value comparison The screen shows two numerical values that show the output values QV output of the timing relay T08 The variable type is DWord The timing relay is run in a loop from 0 to 10 seconds A value range from 0 to 11000 is defined in the Number range format tab The unit of measure is set to s seconds The scaling range is defined from 0 to 11 with 2 decimal places The display change is active and is detected via the internal limit value comparison The numerical value display flashes for the left numerical value and is inverted for the right numerical value Table 5 26 Numerical value analog value output with display change via internal limit value comparison Left numerical value The numerical value flashes in the range from 0 to 3 and from 7 to 10 The upper limit value is set to 7 the display change occurs from numerical value 7 to 10 in the Display change tab and the lower limit value is set to 3 the display change occurs from numerical
47. CARD MODE Vv Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Input signals can be evaluated by Pico GFX 70 with a debounce delay This enables for example the trouble free evaluation of switches and push button actuators subject to contact bounce In many applications however very short input signals have to be monitored In this case the debounce function can be switched off 1 Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 2 Select the SYSTEM menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is password protected you cannot open the System menu until you have unlocked it The input delay debounce is set with the DEBOUNCE menu item Activating Debounce If a tick V is set beside pEBouncg the input delay is set If this is not so proceed as follows 1 Select pEBouncE and press OK Debounce mode will be activated and the display will show pEBouncE v 2 Press ESC to return to the Status display Deactivating Debounce input delay If Pico GFX 70 is showing DEBouncE in the display this means that Debounce mode has already been deactivated 1 Otherwise select DEBOUNCE 2 Press OK Debounce mode will be deactivated and the display will show pEBounce Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 15 Activating and Deactivating the P Buttons P BUTTONS V RUN MODE CARD MODE Vv DEBOUNCE A P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE y DEBOUNCE A P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE Vv DEBOUNCE A IMPORTANT Ho
48. Diagram Display 44449 5 ceh ore hers dealer dua 4 15 Saving and Loading Proorams fiji 5 3 ies AE ek dele ga ee NA 4 17 Working with Contacts and Relays 0 00 cece eae 4 18 Creating and Modifying Connections 0005 4 21 Inserting and Deleting a Circuit Connection 4 23 Saving Circuit Diagrams 34 se owen deen e ees ee hes 4 24 Aborting Circuit Diagram Barty 4 wate haus wa eee Oe 4 24 Searching for Contacts and Coils 42 sins 6 ssa et na es dates 4 24 GO To A Circuit Connection see aiia tata e a aa 4 25 Deleting the Circuit Connection cow iia wnat eaten 4 25 Switching Via the Cursor Buttons sssssssrusrereeres 4 26 Checking the Circuit Diagram 46 secu ea eet hee peas 4 27 Function Block EAtor 2 ci cishhec5 ete SS Sade 4 28 Checking Function BIGEKSi4 4 fs enawawe nial ba se Oe aa wee ae 4 32 Cot COIN Getty conte actos sate ico eye oneal as ic 4 33 PUNCHON DIGCKS outs we na hoi aes Bec A e i aA 4 38 Analog Value Comparator Threshold Value Switch 4 40 Arithmetic Puncnon Bloke uiesiasdeacnstemi am bh aeeewsains 4 43 Data Block Comparator Bhs ein 5 aie BE AR docks whgtaeu AS 4 47 Data Block Transfer ssns csi tind sta She SOG tie ieii ea 4 54 BOGleAD Operations errre raseeris wen i en iaka eE 4 64 Counteis sarat a unn an E a ed n ae A 4 68 High Speed FUNCOMS ienai aw i AA EEEE ae ete 4 74 Preguency Counte Sehen Tir ame r A E EEE C E 4 75 High Speed Counters ss ey cos ie wie oS ee ot aes
49. EN X 01 32 y y function block Function block operating hours OT X EN X 01 04 V y counter enable Operating hours counter function OT X RE X 01 04 V y block reset Send to the Pico Link network PT X T_ X 01 32 V Jv function block trigger Activate pulse width modulation PW X EN X 01 02 V y function bloc Send time to the Pico Link network sc X T_ X 01 A function block trigger Activate set cycle time function block ST X EN X 01 Timing relay function block trigger T X EN X 01 32 v y control coil enable Timing relay function block stop T X st X 01 32 V y Timing relay function block reset T X RE X 01 32 V y Activate value limitation function VC X EN X 01 32 V y block The switching behavior of these relays is set by the coil functions and parameters selected Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 12 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 The options for setting output and marker relays are listed with the description of each coil function The function block coil functions and parameters are listed with the description of each function block type Markers Analog Operands Specific markers are available for actively addressing values or inputs outputs Table 4 4 Markers Markers Pico GFX 70 Number Value Access type display range Analog operand r Read w Write Marker 32 bit MD 01 96 32 bit r Ww Marker 16
50. EN P March 2005 Connection Cable 4 pair twisted cable see General on page A 1 Figure 2 41 Connection assignment A 1 ECAN_H XX A 2 ECANL a as B 3 GND Ground B 4 SEL_IN ECAN_H data cable pin 1 cable pair A ECAN_L data cable pin 2 cable pair A Ground cable GND pin 3 cable pair B Select cable SEL_IN pin 4 cable pair B IMPORTANT Minimum operation with Pico Link functions with the cables ECAN_H ECAN_L and GND The SEL_IN cable is only used for automatic addressing Table 2 42 Prefabricated Cables RJ45 plug on both ends Catalog Number Cable Length cm 1760 CBL INTO1 30 1760 CBL INT03 80 1760 CBL INTO5 150 Material for Self Manufactured Cables e 100m cable 1760 CBL INT300 e Crimping tool for RJ45 plug Bus Termination Resistor The first and last stations in the network must be provided with a bus termination resistor e Value 124 Q e Termination connector 1760 TERM1 Installation 2 35 Cable Length and Cross Sections Por correct operation of the network the cable lengths cross sections and cable resistances must correspond to the following table Table 2 43 Cable length Cable Resistance Cross section m mQ m mm2 AWG up to 40 lt 140 0 13 26 up to 175 lt 70 0 25 to 0 34 23 22 up to 250 lt 60 0 34 to 0 5 22 21 20 up to 400 lt 40 0 5 to 0 6 20 19 up to 600 lt 26 0 75 to 0 8 18 up to 1000 lt 16 1 5 16 The surge impedance of the c
51. Function of the Numerical Converter Function Block IMPORTANT The numerical converter function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil NC EN is active If coil NC EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero BCD Mode The BCD value at gt 11 is provided in decimal format at the input The binary value is formed from this The binary value is interpreted as a BCD value Values greater than 9 1001 are set to the value 9 The BCD value is output as a decimal value at the output QV gt Example 1 Input value gt 11 94ec Binary value 1001 Decimal value QV gt 9 Example 2 Input value gt I1 144ec Binary value 1110 Decimal value QV gt 9 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 127 IMPORTANT The highest binary value represented in BCD is 1001 9 All other higher binary values from 1010 to 1111 are output as 9 This behavior is correct as BCD encoders do not normally generate these values Example 3 Input value gt I1 194 Binary value 00010011 Decimal value QV gt 13 Example 4 Input value gt I1 1610612734 Binary value 1001 100110011001 1001 1001 1001 Decimal value QV gt 9999999 Example 5 Input value gt I1 616734 Binary value 1000000000000000 111100001110 1001 Decimal value QV gt 9099 Example 6 Input value gt I1 2147483 6474 Binary value 01111111111111111111111111111111 Decimal value QV gt 9999999 IMP
52. IA04 IA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coils STO1EN enable coil Memory Requirement of the Set Cycle Time Function Block The set cycle time function block requires 24 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the Set Cycle Time Function Block The function block is used to define a fixed cycle time IMPORTANT The function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil STO1EN is active If coil STO1EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset Actual cycle time is less than the set cycle time If the maximum cycle time present is less than the set cycle time the set cycle time is constant Actual cycle time is greater than the set cycle time If the maximum cycle time present is greater than the set cycle time the set cycle time has no effect Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 139 ATTENTION The shorter the cycle time the faster the control and regulation process A Set as small a value for the set cycle time as possible The processing of the function blocks reading of the inputs and writing of outputs is only carried out once every cycle Exception All function blocks that are processed irrespective of the controller Tim
53. Porta Mure eee a Masts 2 29 TTO OW 28 ss BNO A ERD ea Nb NREL Data Binge 2 29 Connecting Transistor Outputs 4443 34 ca5 jek Paha Ries 2 30 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB4IOF 2 30 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table of Contents 2 Commissioning Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 FV OOsIBI2MOBS neonin mits cashes patie bask ee 2 30 Connecting Analog Outputs 6 35 soa tio aes Seale oeiace eS 2 32 Connectino Servo Valves it uinea i Mahala il etl ds 2 32 Setpoint Entry tor a Drives ca cakes hess Ae eae 2 33 Connecting the Pico Link isa xta asschoasn wo date mreis hoales tedden dod Mac Sos 2 33 PECESSOMES i toi a buen tebe dhe EE a RERA 2 33 Cable Length and Cross Sections oo s cee cea e sane 2 35 Plugging and Unplugeing Network Cables 2 36 Connecting the Serial Interface u Siena tac ete ores 2 38 Expanding Inputs Outputs 4 4 dovnave ec esseer errereen 2 40 Local Expansion siii eo i a a EE 5 Mae ES 2 40 Remote Expansion ecse gecene bv aan mariaa os Anema aad 2 41 Installing the Remote Processof ei 0 eetiw neous ieee ee ees 2 41 Mounting and Removal 0 cece eee ee eee 2 41 Making Connections seeria ap oraa males tans haa pea 2 42 Chapter 3 SWI MINEO seriaro rii ienne ee n wah a se plier 3 1 Setting the Menu Language 2t niaver eds worn Deane tsa 3 1 Opera MOGs er aeei a a E E o E sateen Gaeta 3 2 Creating your First Circuit Diagram s i
54. Q 02 Evaluation of the High Speed Counters CF CH and Cl To evaluate the count pulses of 3 kHz the high speed counter function blocks operate with an interrupt routine The length of the circuit diagram and the associated cycle time has no effect on the counter result Memory Management of the Pico GFX 70 The GFX is provided with three different memories e The working memory or RAM size 8 KByte The RAM only stores the data when the device power supply is active e The screen memory size 24 KByte The screen memory stores the visualization data created with PicoSoft Pro retentively e The program memory size 8 KByte The program memory stores the program retentively Distribution of Data in the RAM When the power supply is switched on the RAM stores the program the retentive data and the screens to be displayed This has a direct effect on the size of the program and the screens The number of retentive data bytes reduces the memory available for program and screens The largest screen to be displayed likewise reduces the memory available for the program Inside Pico GFX 70 8 5 Delay Times for Inputs and Outputs IMPORTANT Only use as much retentive data as is actually required The screen with the largest memory requirement reduces the memory available for the program Several smaller screens allow more space for the program Use as small pictures as possible with 1 bit grayscale The pictures should
55. R4 RS R6 R7 RB RI R10 R11 R12 L N N Te 100 240 V Installation 2 23 IMPORTANT When using a 100 nF capacitor the drop out time of the input increases by 80 66 6 ms at 50 60 Hz A resistor can be connected in series with the circuit shown in order to restrict the inrush current Figure 2 24 Limitation of the inrush current with a resistor S o 1 kO 100 nF 275 V h Y OO QOOOYSOOSO OOVOOS E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 RIO R11 R12 L N N E 100 240V Connecting DC Inputs Use input terminals I1 to 112 to connect push button actuators switches or 3 or 4 wire proximity switches Given the high residual current do not use 2 wite proximity switches Input signal voltage range e 11 to I6 19 110 OFF signal OV dc to 5V dc ON signal 15V dc to 28 8V dc e 17 18 111 112 OFF signal lt 8V dc ON signal gt 8V dc Input current e J1 to 16 19 110 R1 to R12 3 3 mA at 24V dc e 17 18 111 112 2 2 mA at 24V dc Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 24 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 2 25 GFX DC L01 02 oa a w d gt 1A sA lal A OOo O oO Oo OO O OOOO oon oOo HWW M 2 3 4 5S 16 17 181910 1112 IMPO
56. SH Upper setpoint gt SL Lower setpoint gt SV Defined actual value Preset QV gt Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change setpoint values and or the preset value and the enable of the parameter display Value Range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Each pulse is counted twice Example value at CI QV gt 42000 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 87 The counter has counted 21000 pulses Behavior when value range is exceeded e The function block sets the switching contact CI CY to status 1 e The function block retains the value of the last valid operation IMPORTANT Counter CI counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact CI CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected Inputs The function block inputs gt sx gt su and gt sv can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 IMPORTANT The actual value is only erased in RUN mode with a selective reset signal Publication 1760 UM002B EN P Mar
57. Signal offset 90 1 Four of the digital dc inputs can alternately be used as 0 to 10V dc analog inputs These inputs can be used as either digital or analog not both For example you could use 4 analog inputs plus 8 digital inputs Table A 11 GFX I O Modules Relay Output Specifications Specification Number of relay outputs 1760 1A12XOW4l 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 1760 OW2 4 2 for the 1760 OW2 Type of outputs Relays In groups of 1 Connection of outputs in parallel to increase the output Not permissible Protection for an output relay Miniature circuit breaker B16 16A or fuse slow blow 8A Potential isolation to mains power supply input PC interface memory module Pico Link network expansion 0 Safe isolation 300V ac Basic insulation 600V ac Mechanical life span 10 x 10 switch operations Contacts relays Conventional thermal current UL 8A 10A Recommended for load at 12V ac dc gt 500 mA Protected against short circuit cos 1 16A characteristic B B16 at 600A Protected against short circuit cos 0 5 to 0 7 16A characteristic B B16 at 900A Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp contact coil 6 kV Rated insulation voltage U Rated operational voltage U 250V ac Safe isolation to EN 50178 between coil and contact 300V ac Safe isolation to EN 50178 between two contacts 300V ac Making capacity IEC 6
58. The cursor changes to the display of the network station NT and flashes The station number is displayed in front of the inputs and outputs Change the number of the required station using the up down arrow keys Press the OK button If you want to view the state of the inputs and outputs of a local expansion press the OK button If you press the ESC button again or the OK button the display of the input and output states of the station is terminated IMPORTANT The station showing the status on its display cannot read its own data from the network Example NT3 flashes on station 3 The inputs and outputs 3I 3R 3Q and 3S cannot be displayed If the NT3 display is not flashing the inputs and outputs are shown Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 20 Commissioning Configuring the Connection If you wish to set up point to point communication with another station this for the Terminal Mode Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 can be done using either the serial interface or the Pico Link The GFX must be provided with a display and keypad The connection must be configured for this purpose see also Introduction to the Serial Interface on page 6 16 IMPORTANT Ensure that the other station supports the Serial Interface mode Proceed as follows 1 Connect both stations together Only use original connection cables The connector marked POW Side must be plugged into a GF
59. Unit of measure e Scaling range e Input format The display of the value sign can be forced Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Operability tab In the Operability tab select the associated variable for disabling the entry element Value Entry Example Program The program consists of seven screens that can be selected using the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 When the Pico GFX 70 is in RUN mode you can change values that are processed in the program by using the up down and left right cursor buttons The Pico GFX 70 shows the actual values in the display In order to change values the Pico GFX 70 must first switch to Selection mode In Selection mode you can select the value entry element containing the values you wish to change 1 Press OK to switch the Pico GFX 70 to Selection mode Use ESC to exit Selection mode The selected value entry element will flash If several value entry elements are present use the up down and left right cursor buttons to select the required element see Screen 7 2 Press the OK button to move from Selection mode to Entry mode 3 Move to the required position using the left and right cursor buttons change the value with the up and down cursor buttons 4 Accept the modified value by pressing OK Press ESC if you wish to retain the p
60. a reset This speeds up the startup behavior of the function block Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 104 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IMPORTANT The function block updates the output value every time recovery time T expires The function block operates according to the following equation Y T Tg x IK x x YD Y t calculated output value for scan time t T Scan time Tg Recovery time Kp proportional gain x t Actual value with scan time t Y t 1 Output value with scan time t 1 Scan time Scan time T depends on the set recovery time value Recovery time Ty Scan time Ta 0 1 sto1s 10 ms 1 s to 6553 s Ty x 0 01 GET Fetch a Value from the Network The function block allows you to selectively read get a 32 bit value from the network The GET function block fetches data which another station has made available on the Pico Link network with a PUT function block GT01 02 20 Qv gt Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 105 Figure 4 43 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with GET function block GT01Q1 DB16T Parameter display and parameter set for the GET function block GT01 GET function block fetch a value from the network number 01 02 Station number from which the value is sent Possible station number 01 to 08 20 Send function block PT 20 of the sending station Po
61. attempts to enter a password the DELETE FUNCTION prompt appears This prompt is not displayed if selected However it is no longer possible to make changes in protected areas if you forget the password Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 4 Pico GFX 70 Settings Activating the Password You can activate an existing password in three different ways automatically when Pico GFX 70 is switched on again automatically after a protected circuit diagram is loaded automatically if a telegram has not been sent on the PC interface 30 minutes after unlocking the device using PicoSoft Pro e via the password menu 1 Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 2 Open the password menu via the menu option SECURITY Pico GFX 70 will only show this password menu if a password is CHANGE PW ptesent ACTIVATE IMPORTANT Make a note of the password before you activate it If the password is no longer known Pico GFX 70 can be unlocked DELETE FUNCTION is not active however the citcuit diagram and data settings will be lost ATTENTION If the password is unknown or lost and the delete password function is deactivated The unit can only be reset to the factory setting by the manufacturer The program and all data are lost 3 Select ACTIVATE PW and confirm with OK The password is now active Pico GFX 70 will automatically return to the Status display Publication 1760 UM002B EN
62. available memory the available screen memory and the required memory for the active screen element If the available memory is exceeded the indicator will turn red Figure 5 2 Status Bar Location Mode System settings Security Communication parameters 1760 DUB LDFC IB12XOB410F Device Designation Program Name Mode Configuration Status Bar Memory 6552 byte s free Screen memory 23404 byte Project editor 1760 DUB LDFC IB12 OB410 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Western European Character Table Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 3 Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning 0 28 56 8 84 T 1 29 57 9 85 U 2 30 58 86 V 3 31 59 87 Ww 4 32 Blank 60 lt 88 X 5 33 61 89 y 6 34 5 62 gt 90 Z 7 35 63 91 8 36 64 92 9 37 65 A 93 10 38 amp 66 B 94 11 39 i 67 95 F 12 40 68 D 96 13 41 69 E 97 a 14 42 d 70 F 98 b 15 43 71 G 99 c 16 44 72 H 100 d 17 45 73 l 101 e 18 46 74 J 102 19 47 75 K 103 g 20 48 0 76 L 104 h 21 49 1 77 M 105 i 22 50 2 78 N 106 j 23 51 3 79 0 107 k 24 52 4 80 P 108 25 53 5 81 Q 109 m 26 54 6 82 R 110 n 27 55 7 83 S 111 o 112 p 141 i 170 a 19 A 113 q 142 171 200 114 r 143 172 201 115 s 144 173 i 202 116 t 145 174 203 117 u 146 175 204 Pu
63. bit MW 01 96 16 bit rw Marker 8 bit MB 01 96 8 bit r Ww Marker 1 bit M 0 96 1 bit rw Analog inputs basic IA X X 01 04 10 bit r unit Analog output QAX X 01 10 bit r W When using the COM communication mode you can make the following data accesses on the slave Note the REMOTE MARKER SETTING in the following table Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 13 Table 4 5 Data Access Options Markers Pico GFX 70 Number Value Access type display range Analog operand r Read w Write Marker 32 bit 1MD 01 20 32 bit rw Marker 16 bit IMW 01 40 16 bit rw Marker 8 bit 1MB 01 80 8 bit rw Marker 1 bit 1M 0 96 1 bit rw Analog inputs basic 11A X X 01 04 10 bit r unit Analog output 10A X X 01 10 bit r The following rules apply if you want to use selective binary operands contacts from the markers MD MW MB Table 4 6 Composition of the markers Applies to Left most Right least MD MW significant bit significant bit MB M byte word byte word 32 bit MD1 16 bit MW2 MW1 8 bit MB4 MB3 MB2 MB1 1 bit M32 to M25 M24 to M17 M16 to M9 M8 to M1 32 bit MD2 16 bit MW4 MW3 8 bit MB8 MB7 MB6 MB5 1 bit M64 to M57 M56 to M49 M48 to M41 M40 to M33 32 bit MD3 16 bit MW6 MW5 8 bit MB12 MB11 MB10 MB9 1 bit M96 to M89 M88 to M81 M80 to M73 M72 to M65 32 bit MD4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 14
64. comparator function block BC X EQ BC X EQ X 01 32 4 54 comparison result Data block comparator function block BT X E1 BT X E1 X 01 32 4 54 error number of elements exceeded Data block transfer function block BT X E2 BT X E2 X 01 32 4 54 error range overlap Data block transfer function block BT X E3 BT X E3 X 01 32 4 54 error invalid offset Boolean sequence function block BV X ZE BV X ZE X 01 32 4 64 value zero Table 4 2 Contacts Contact Counter function block upper set point value exceeded Overflow Make contact C X OF Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Break contact C X OF Number X 01 32 4 7 Page 4 68 Counter function block lower set point value undershot Fall below C X FB C X FB X 01 32 4 68 Counter function block actual value equal to zero C X ZE C X ZE X 01 32 4 68 Counter function block actual value has exceeded counter range CARRY C X CY C x cy X 01 32 4 68 Frequency counter function block upper set point value exceeded Overflow CF X OF CF X OF 01 04 4 75 Frequency counter function block lower set point value undershot below Fall CF FB 01 04 4 75 Frequency counter function block actual value equal to zero CF ZE 01 04 4 75 High speed counter function block upper set p
65. content MBO65 and MD81 Byte 2 are not identical Example Comparison of marker blocks range violation error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MD60 Block 2 at MD90 Each block is 30 bytes long Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 MD60 Comparison range 2 gt 12 MD90 Number of bytes gt No 30 TTP The comparison is in byte format MD90 to MD96 is 28 bytes The number of bytes is 30 bytes Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 53 The error message Number of comparison elements exceeds one of the comparison ranges is output BCO1E1 is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks range overlap error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MW60 Block 2 at MW64 Each block is 12 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 mw60 Comparison range 2 gt 12 mwe4 Number of bytes gt No 12 IMPORTANT The comparison is in byte format MW60 to MW64 is 8 bytes The number of bytes is 12 bytes The error message Comparison ranges overlap is output BCO1E2 is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks invalid offset error Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MW 40 Block 2 at MW54 The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 mw4o Comparison range 2 gt 12 Mw54 Number of bytes gt No c orQv IMPORTANT The value of C 01QV i
66. covered by the bitmap in front of it In this way it is possible to create the impression of a moving and expanding arrow Figure 5 12 Expanding arrow OverLlaid OverLlaid Screen 3 The third screen contains five fully overlaid bitmaps These are made invisible in succession from the top to the bottom via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and the LED 3 make contact bit logic The Covered option is selected in the Background area of the Display tab The overlaid section of the bitmap is therefore not visible Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 19 The first bitmap at the lowest level is permanently activated making it visible as long as all other bitmaps are invisible This produces a small moving picture Figure 5 13 Rotating arrows t Numerical Value This screen element allows you to display untreated or scaled signal states in decimal format Value and Scaling Range The value range defines the range that is to be displayed If the values are below or above this range the Pico GFX 70 activates an underflow or overflow signal The scaling range is used for scaling the value range The lower and upper values of the scaling range are assigned to the lower and upper values of the value range respectively The Pico GFX 70 displays the value range if a scaling range has not been defined Examples In order for example to display the value range 0 to 255 of a counter as a percenta
67. diagram on the memory module contains function relays that Pico GFX 70 does not recognize The analog value comparator function block is only available on 24V dc versions of Pico GFX 70 Programs with visualization components are only supported by the GFX IMPORTANT If the memory module is password protected the password will also be transferred to the Pico GFX 70 memory and will be active immediately Deleting a Circuit Diagram on the Memory Module 1 Select the DELETE CARD menu option 2 Press OK to confirm the prompt and to delete the memory module content 3 Press ESC to cancel Memory Module Compatibility of the Programs IMPORTANT Memory modules with programs are always read by Pico GFX 70 devices with the newer higher operating system version The program is executable If programs are written with a newer operating system higher number on the memory module this program can only be read and executed by the same version or a higher one Inside Pico GFX 70 8 15 PicoSoft Pro PicoSoft Pro is a PC program for creating testing and managing circuit diagrams for Pico GFX 70 IMPORTANT You should only transfer data between the PC and Pico GFX 70 using the Pico GFX 70 PC interface cable which is available as accessory 1760 CBL PC02 The cable is also available as part of the Software cable kit catalog number 1760 PICOPRO PC02 IMPORTANT Pico GFX 70 cannot exchange data with the PC while the ci
68. displays six dashes No password available 5 Press OK six zeros will appear 6 Set the password using the cursor buttons left and right arrow key to select position in password up and down arrow key to set a value between 0 to 9 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 3 7 Save the new password by pressing OK ENTER PASSWORD 000042 8 Use OK to exit the password display and proceed with ESC and to the RANGE menu The scope of the password has not yet been considered The password is now valid but not yet activated Selecting the Scope of the Password 1 Press the OK button CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A ee 2 Select the function to be protected or the menu TIME OPERATING MODE 2 3 Press the OK button to protect the function or menu tick protected INTERFACE DELETE FUNCTION IMPORTANT Standard protection encompasses the programs and circuit diagram At least one function or menu must be protected e CIRCUIT DIAGRAM The password is effective on the program with circuit diagram and non enabled function blocks e PARAMETERS The PARAMETERS menu is protected e TIME Date and time are protected with the password e OPERATING MODE The toggling of the RUN or STOP operating mode is protected e INTERFACE The interface is inhibited for access to a connected device Programs or commands to other devices connected via the Pico Link are routed further e DELETE FUNCTION After four failed
69. e Unit None e Scaling range None e Always show sign No Right column Numerical value 1 e Value range 0 to 4000 Unit None Scaling range 0 to 4 Decimal places 0 e e e e Always show sign No Numerical value 2 e Value range 0 to 50000 e Unit ms e Scaling range None e Always show sign No Numerical value 2 e Value range 0 to 4000 e Unit s Scaling range 0 to 4 Decimal place 1 Always show sign No Numerical value 3 e Value range 0 to 50000 e Unit ms e Scaling range None e Always show sign Yes Numerical value 3 e Value range 0 to 4000 e Unit s Scaling range 0 to 4 Decimal places 2 Always show sign Yes Figure 5 15 Output formats Timer 4 1873 2 1873ms 1 9s 1873ms 1 87s Screen 2 Screen 2 shows a simple example of the visualization of timing relay times using the function block parameter FB parameter from the Associated variable tab The screen contains three numerical values These are associated with the QV output of timing relay T04 Table 5 16 Numerical value visualization of timing relay times Numerical value 1 Start value of the timing relay T04 FB parameter 12 zero as input 12 is not assigned with on delayed relays Numerical value 2 Setpoint of the timing relay T04 FB parameter 11 4000 as input 11 is assigned with the constant 4 s 4000 ms in the function block editor Numerical value 3 Actual value o
70. for I1 to I4 0 025 ms 15 I6 and I9 to 110 0 4 ms 17 18 111 and 112 0 2 ms IMPORTANT Ensure that input signals are noise free if the input debounce is disabled Pico GFX 70 will even react to very short signals Inside Pico GFX 70 8 7 Monitoring of Short Circuit Depending on the type of expansion module in use it is possible to use the internal inputs 116 R15 and R16 to monitor for short circuits or overloads on and Overload with pu u 1760 IB12X0B8 an output e Pico GFX 70 116 Group fault signal for outputs Q1 to Q4 1760 IB12XOB8 R16 Group fault signal for outputs S1 to 4 R16 Group fault signal for outputs S5 to S8 State Outputs 116 R15 or R16 No fault found 0 switched off make contact At least one output has a fault 1 switched on make contact IMPORTANT 116 can only be edited with Pico GFX 70 versions which have transistor outputs Examples The following examples are for 116 Q1 to Q4 Example 1 Selecting an Output with Fault Indication Figure 8 5 Circuit diagram for fault output via 116 The above circuit diagram functions as follows If a transistor output reports a fault M16 is set by 116 The break contact of M16 switches off output Q1 M16 can be cleared by resetting the Pico GFX 70 power supply Example 2 Output of Operating State Figure 8 6 Output of operating state I 01 M 16 E Q
71. gt gt SL gt SV Qv gt 0 gt SL gt SV QV gt 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 157 The timing relay works like a flashing relay The Pico GFX 70 symbol for the flashing relay is The function is set on the top right beside the number in the parameter display The time base is set to the right of the flashing function Leave the time base set to s for seconds Move the cursor to the right over the character to input the time setpoint value gt 11 If the same setpoint value is input for gt 11 and gt 12 the timing relay functions as a synchronous flasher The character means that the parameters of this timing relay can be modified using the PARAMETERS menu Confirm the value input with OK Press ESC to leave circuit diagram entry Complete the citcuit diagram Test the circuit diagram using the power flow display Switch Pico GFX 70 to RUN mode and return to the circuit diagram Each parameter set can be displayed using the power flow display for the circuit diagram Move the cursor onto c 01 and press OK The parameter set for the counter is displayed with actual and setpoint values Move the cursor downwards until you see the value QV gt Switch the input I5 The actual value changes On the display c_ indicates that the counting coil is actuated If the actual and upper setpoint values of the counter are the sam
72. gt I1 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 131 Parameter display and parameter set for the PUT function block PTO1 PUT function block places a value onto the network number 11 Does not appear in the parameter display gt I Setpoint value which is put onto the Pico Link network Input The function block input gt 11 can be assigned the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 JAO3 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Contacts PTO1Q1 to PT32Q 1 state of the trigger coil Coils PTOIT to PT327 trigger coils Memory Requirement of the PUT Function Block The PUT function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input PUT Diagnostics The PUT function block only functions when the Pico Link network is functioning correctly see Signs of Life of the Individual Stations and Diagnostics on page 6 12 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 132 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Function of the PUT Function Block Figure 4 57 Signal diagram of PUT function block 1 trigger coil 2 trigger coil contact feedback 3 send Pulse Width Modulation Pico GFX 70 provides 2 pulse width modulation function blocks PW01 and PW02 The function blocks are connected directl
73. is assigned to a language in the Language selection field The languages available are defined in the Screen overview Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 7 Programming Static Text in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button to drag the Static text screen element onto the screen 2 Place the mouse over the Static text screen element hold down the left mouse button and drag the screen element to the required position 3 Enter the required text in the Static text tab and select the language to which the text is to be assigned You define the available languages in the Languages tab of the Screen overview These languages apply to the text elements of all screens The height of the element frame adjusts itself to the font size either normal or double font size You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When changing to double font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the element can be adjusted as required You can set the size required by holding down the left mouse button and dragging a selection handle of the element frame When applicable ensure that the elements provide sufficient space in all languages This can be checked easily in the screen overview The following examples explain the function of Static text Static Text Examp
74. lt che Ge Sik ee oaks 3 3 Starting Point Status Display pips cs secseia ty tea Sea atin nee eo sn 3 5 Circuit Diagram Display ica eae ens pCi BER Sep e 3 6 From the First Contact to the Output Coil 0 3 7 Winia ne hoe ede G ena E gaits as setae wrap lien css 3 8 Testing the Circuit Diagram 221i iat tne kee Pie a Ieee 3 10 Deleting the Circuit Diagram ee in Seeediad we eae Rees 3 13 Fast Circuit Diagram Entty sh sea een eae oa hoe 3 13 Configuring a Pico Link Network soi evince Aided a eed 3 14 Entering the Network Station Number 0 0 060 6 ees 3 15 Entering Network Stations sce us se so eed awed ae neon 3 16 Configuring a Pico Link Network 000 00004 3 17 Changing the Pico Link Configuration 48 3 18 Displaying the Status Display of Other Stations 3 18 Configuring the Connection for the Terminal Mode 3 20 Setting up the Serial iterates wlan te blest ine rene 3 21 Terminal Moder is tet ete tt E ae ONES ate hg hes 3 25 Chapter 4 Pico GE X70 Operation css ec arscenn x tasi aeaii At ahd tthe eae 4 1 Buttons for Drawing Circuit Diagrams and Function Block Usage iid otcia kan peewee eee we 4 1 Operating PHC ples severtena pews cua tare NEE ee ne meee 4 2 Usable Relays and Function Blocks coils 00 4 9 Markers Analog Operands ecient wae ten nek eens ete 4 12 Table of Contents 3 INidimber Formats rearset ue foals cia sie Rita aie asi 4 15 Circuit
75. not functioning faulty The time required to detect that the Serial Interface is not working properly depends on the baud rate selected and the event concerned Baud rate Time required for detection of faulty Serial Interface connection CRC error data content No response no hardware incorrect connection remote station not in operation 9600 Baud 250 ms 1 558 120 ms 0 8 s 19200 Baud ATTENTION A If the states of the inputs outputs or data are required by a station without fail the respective diagnostics contact should be evaluated and the information applied in accordance with its respective application If the respective diagnostics contacts are not evaluated it may cause faults in your application Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 22 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Chapter 7 Pico GFX 70 Settings Settings can only be carried out on Pico GFX 70 models provided with buttons and LCD display PicoSoft Pro can be used to set all models via the software Password Protection The Pico GFX 70 can be protected by a password against unauthorized access In this case the password consists of a value between 000001 and 999999 The number combination 000000 is used to delete a password Password protection inhibits access to selected areas The System menu is always protected by an activated password The password can prot
76. of the 256 circuit connections on the display at the same time Pico GFX 70 automatically scrolls up or down the display to show hidden circuit connections even empty ones if you move the cursor past the top or bottom of the display A new citcuit connection is added below the last connection or inserted above the cursor position 1 Position the cursor on the first contact field of a circuit connection 2 Press ALT The existing circuit connection with all its additional connections is shifted downwards The cursor is then positioned directly in the new circuit connection Figure 4 10 Inserting a new circuit connection Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 24 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Saving Circuit Diagrams 1 Press the ESC button to save a circuit diagram The menu on the left appears in the status line I 01 I 02 Q 01 Hy0191 2 Press OK to save the entire program circuit diagram and function a blocks SAVE V After saving you will be in the CIRCUIT DIAGRAM menu Aborting Circuit Diagram Entry 1 If you want to exit without saving the circuit diagram press ESC I 01 I 02 Q 01 Hy0191 2 Use the arrow buttons to select the CANCEL menu A Sf 3 Press OK The circuit diagram is closed without saving Searching for Contacts and Coils You can search for contacts and coils in the following way I 01 I 02 Q 01 H 0191 1
77. of the text function block Memory Requirement of the Text Output Function Block The text output function block function block requires 160 bytes of memory This is irrespective of the text size Data Function Block The data function block allows you to selectively save a value Setpoint values for the function block can be saved in this manner Figure 4 39 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with data function block GT01Q1 DB16T DB16Q1 S D 02EN Parameter display and parameter set for the data function block DB16 Data block function block number 16 Appears in the parameter display gt I1 Input value QvVv gt Actual value Inputs The function block input gt 11 can be assigned the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 94 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Contacts DB01Q1 to DB32Q1 Contact make contact DB Q1 switches to status 1 if the trigger signal is set to 1 Coils DBO1T_ to DB32T_ acceptance of the value at gt 11 w
78. onto a contact field or coil field which has already been assigned IMPORTANT In a circuit connection Pico GFX 70 automatically connects contacts and the terminal to the relay coil if there are no empty fields in between Never work backwards You will learn why wiring backwards does not work in Effects on the Creation of the Circuit Diagram on page 8 3 Figure 4 8 Circuit diagram with five contacts invalid I 01 Q 04 I 03 When wiring more than four contacts in series use one of the 96 M marker relays Figure 4 9 Circuit diagram with M marker relay I 01 Q 04 I 03 SM 01 I 02 I 04 mM 01 s Q 02 Deleting Connections 1 Move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field to the right of the connection that you want to delete Press ALT to switch to Connect mode 2 Press DEL Pico GFX 70 will delete a connection Closed adjacent connections will be retained Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 23 If several circuit connections are connected to one another Pico GFX 70 first deletes the vertical connection If you press DEL again it will delete the horizontal connection as well IMPORTANT You cannot delete connections that Pico GFX 70 has created automatically 3 Close the delete operation with ALT or by moving the cursor to a contact or coil field Inserting and Deleting a Circuit Connection The Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram display shows three
79. output relay Q 01 08 y Pico GFX 70 output relay expansion S 01 08 y network stations only network master Station address 2 to 8 Pico GFX 70 expansion output relay S 01 08 y Bit outputs SN 01 32 y Station address 1 to 8 General coils Markers M 01 96 y COM slave marker REMOTE 1M 01 96 Jv MARKER Jump label 01 32 y Function blocks Analog value comparator function A 01 32 v block Arithmetic function block AR 01 32 y Data block comparator activate BC X EN 0132 y y Transfer data block trigger coil BT X T_ 0132 y y Boolean sequences BV 01 32 y Counter function block counter input c x C_ X 01 32 Iv J Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 10 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table 4 3 Usable Relays and Function Blocks Coils Relay function block Pico Number Coil Parameter GFX 70 display Counter function block direction C xX D_ X 01 32 IV v Counter function block set counter C X SE X 01 32 IV A value Preset Counter function block reset counter C X RE X 01 32 IV v value Frequency counter function block CF X EN X 01 04 V v activate counter enable High speed counter function block CH X D_ X 01 04 V v direction High speed counter function block CH X EN X 01 04 v v a
80. texts in one message text element is also illustrated The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display The Message text tab is used to assign the message to be output with a particular state of the associated variable In this example if Q1 0 the message no data is output and Information is output if Q1 1 All other message text elements have only one message text which is displayed when the corresponding output Q 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 32 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Screen 2 Text 1 Text 2 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 5 33 Text display using Boolean operands Q1 0 Q1 Q2 Q3 1 no data Information with Boolean operands Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of message texts by means of the associated variable A message text is also enlarged in the display The screen contains two message text elements These are activated via the outputs Q1 and Q3 and appear in the display The texts are only displayed if the corresponding outputs are 1 No message is assigned to output status 0 Screen 3 Screen 3 illustrates the control of an enlarged message text element containing two message texts that are assigned to the two states of output Q2 Q2 0 gt Message text Q2 OFF Q2 1 gt Message text Q2 ON Figure 5 34 Message texts using a
81. the electrical contact between relay contacts and the coils They can be created across several circuit connections Each point of intersection is a connection e The number of free bytes is displayed so that you can recognize how much memory is available for the circuit diagram and function blocks Pico GFX 70 Circuit Diagram Display Por greater legibility the circuit diagram display of the Pico GFX 70 shows t0feerrt 0222 two contacts per circuit connection or one contact plus a coil in series A total Q 01 Hy0191 of 16 characters per circuit connection and three circuit connections plus the status line can be displayed simultaneously L 1 C 1 B 7840 You can move between the contact fields with the left and right cursor buttons The number of the circuit connection and the contact are displayed in the lower status line THT The circuit diagram display performs two functions e In STOP mode it is used to edit the circuit diagram e In RUN mode it is used to check the circuit diagram using the Power flow display Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 17 Saving and Loading Programs Pico GFX 70 provides you with two ways of saving circuit diagrams externally e Saving to a memory module e Saving on a PC with PicoSoft Pro Once they have been saved programs can be reloaded into Pico GFX 70 edited and run All program data is saved in Pico GFX 70 In the event of a p
82. the password request by pressing ESC which however will only move you back to the previous screen Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program stat text_manual screen change with password e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes Screen 4 Screen 4 shows four static texts arranged in rows Static Text Example Program 3 Different Display Formats with Screen Activation via a Counter The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The individual screens are activated via counter C01 The counter s SH upper switch value is 5 The activation pulse for activating the screens is supplied by timing relay T01 This generates the counter values 0 to 5 Screen 1 is activated with counter value 1 screen 2 with counter value 2 etc Once the counter s upper switch value has been reached timing relay T02 is started which resets the counter This therefore produces a continuous loop Timing relay T02 provides a reset delay for the counter Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program stat text_automatic screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes Sc
83. to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Pause Time Changing the Write Repetition Rate Manually Every Pico Link segment automatically determines the number of active stations the baud rate and the total number of bytes which are transmitted The minimum pause time which a device requires is automatically determined using this data to ensure that all devices can send their messages If a pause time is to be increased the value of the BUSDELAY must be set greater than zero Value 1 doubles the pause time value 15 will increase it by a factor of 16 tonew tp X 1 n tonew new pause time tp pause time determined by the network n value on BUSDELAY mna Ac increase in the pause time means that fewer messages inputs outputs bit data word data are transferred per time unit The reaction speed of the entire controller depends on the baud rate the pause time and the quantity of transferred data The smaller the amount of data transferred the faster the reaction times of the system IMPORTANT An increase in the pause time is only useful during commissioning To ensure that the data for the power flow display is updated faster in the PC a longer range for this data is created on the network within this pause time Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 9 Send Each Change on the Inputs Outputs SEND 10 The SEND IO function should be used if you w
84. trigger coil drops out before the on delay is reached e Range C The Stop coil stops the timeout of the on delay e Range D The stop coil has no effect in this range Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 149 Figure 4 71 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 2 e Range E The Stop coil stops the timeout of the off delay e Range F The Reset coil resets the relay after the on delay has elapsed e Range G The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact whilst the on delay is timing out After the Reset coil drops out the time elapses normally Figure 4 72 Signal diagram of timing relay on and off delayed 3 e Range H The Reset signal interrupts the timing out of the set time Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 150 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Timing Relay Single Pulse Figure 4 73 Signal diagram of timing relay single pulse 1 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 e Range A The trigger signal is short and is lengthened e Range B The Trigger signal is longer than the set time e Range C The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 151 Figure 4 74 Signal diagram of timing relay single pulse 2
85. work with an offset specify one of the following variables at function block input gt z1 or gt 12 e Constant e Actual value QV of a function block e Analog input IA e Analog output QA The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MBO1 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts BCO1E1 to BC32E1 the number of comparison elements exceeds one of the comparison ranges BCO01E2 to BC32E2 the two comparison ranges overlap BC01E3 to BC32E3 the specified offset of the comparison ranges is outside of the permissible range Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 49 BCO1EQ to BC32EQ output of the comparison result Only valid if the BC EN enable has been triggered Status 0 Comparison ranges not equal Status 1 Comparison ranges equal Coils BCO1EN to BC32EN Enable coil of the data block comparator function block Memory Requirement of the Data Block Comparator Function Block The data block comparator function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Function of the Data Block Comparator Function Block The data block comparator function block compares two consistent data blocks The comparison is active if the BC EN enable is triggered IMPORTANT No data blocks are compared if an error is present The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the enable
86. you can select via the up and down cursor buttons The screen change is defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 This program illustrates the overlaying of bitmaps in a screen The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LED 3 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Bitmap_automatic screen change e60 Screen 1 The first screen contains five half overlaid bitmaps These are activated via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and marker M01 and appear in the display The half overlaid bitmaps are activated in succession The Covered option is selected in the Background area of the Display tab therefore causing the overlaid part of the bitmap to be covered by the bitmap in front of it In this way it is possible to create the impression of a moving arrow Figure 5 11 Overlaid bitmaps Half overlaid Half overlaid Screen 2 The second screen contains five overlaid bitmaps with each subsequent bitmap being larger than the previous one displayed The individual bitmaps are made visible in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and the marker M01 break contact bit logic The Covered option is selected in the Background area of the Display tab therefore causing the overlaid part of the bitmap to be
87. 0 gt I2 QV gt 14 42 EN AR01 ADD CP10 T 18 X L 001 RUN ARO1 ADD gt I1 20056 gt I2 1095 QV gt 21151 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Checking Function Blocks You can check function blocks in the same way as circuit diagrams The device is in RUN mode Checking from the circuit diagram Position the cursor on a contact or a coil of the required function block Press OK The function block will be displayed in this case a timing relay e gt I1 set time of the timing relay e QV gt the actual value is 14 minutes 42 seconds e The enable coil is actuated EN is visible If a coil of a function block is actuated in RUN mode the coil name with the coil designation will appear on the display Checking the Function Block via the Function Block Editor You access the function block list via the FUNCTION RELAYS menu 1 Select the required function block In this case the arithmetic function block ARO1 in the Adder mode 2 Press the OK button The function block is presented with the actual values and the result Displaying the Operands When Checking the Function Blocks If you want to know which operands are used on the function block inputs and outputs when checking the function block press the ALT button on the displayed value ARO1 ADD gt I1 C 01QV gt gt I2 1095 QV gt MD 56 AR01 ADD gt I1 20056 gt I2 1095 QV gt 21151 The o
88. 0 B gt DY1 MO gt DY1 TU gt DY2 gt DY2 gt ON 00 00 gt ON gt OFF gt OFF 00 00 Year Time Switch Pico GFX 70 is equipped with a real time clock which you can use in the circuit diagram as a 7 day time switch and a year time switch IMPORTANT The procedure for setting the time is described under Setting Date Time and Daylight Savings Time on page 7 11 Pico GFX 70 provides 32 year time switches HY01 to HY32 for a total of 128 switching times Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set four on and off times The channels are set via the parameter display The time and date are backed up in the event of a power failure and continue to run However the time switch relays will no longer continue to switch The contacts are kept open when de energized See General on page A 1 for information on the buffer time Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 112 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 HY30 B gt OFF Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring of a Year Time Switch A year time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram as a contact Figure 4 49 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with year time switch Parameter display and parameter set for the year time switch HY HY30 Year time switch function block number 30 B Time switch channel B Appears in the parameter display gt ON Switch on time gt OFF Switch off time Channels 4 channels are av
89. 01 to S 06 S 08 You can use the signal states of the output relays as make or break contacts in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram for additional switching conditions The relay or transistor outputs are used to switch loads such as fluorescent tubes filament bulbs contactors relays or motors Check the technical thresholds and output data before installing such devices See page A 1 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW4I0F Figure 2 32 1760 IB12XOWA4IF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF relay outputs R oe e a a a a 230V 8A 2A Ql Q2 Q3 24V 1000 W Qa 2 2P a ie 8 AB 16 A L1 L2 L3 115 250 V Installation 2 29 1760 1A12XOW6I Figure 2 33 1760 IA12XOW6I relay outputs 8A B 16 ba ha a IP a la L1 L2 L3 115 230 V TENSE 24V 1760 0W2 Figure 2 34 1760 0W2 relay outputs R 24 V 8A 2A 115V 8A 2A 230V 8A 2A a re at 10 x 58W AP 25 000 aya 98 10 000 000 X 0V N 8 A B 16 f 2 L1 L2 L3 115 230 V Lo 24V R a 24 V 8A 2A 115V 8A 2A 230V 8A 2A O 2 10x 58W mn 1000 W 25 000 Unlike the inputs the 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF and 1760 IA12XOW6I relay outputs can be connected to different lines ATTENTION A Do not exceed the maximum vo
90. 02 1 MW03 1MW04 MW03 MW04 1MB05 1MBO6 1MBO7 1MBO8 MB05 MBO06 MB07 MB08 1 M33 to 1 M64 M33 to M64 MD03 MDO03 MW05 1 MWO06 MW05 MW06 MBOS 1MB10 1MB11 1MB12 MBOS MB10 MB11 MB12 M65 to 1 M96 M65 to M96 MD04 MD04 1 MW07 1 MW08 MW07 MW08 1 MD20 MD20 1 MW39 1 MW40 MW39 MW40 1MB77 1MB78 1MB79 1MB80 MB77 MB78 MB79 MB80 The normal rules for addressing the markers apply IMPORTANT Ensure a clear separation of the write range of the two stations The active station should write different markers to the remote station Otherwise the markers in the last write operation will be overwritten Configuration of the Serial Interface The active station must have the following settings in order for the Serial Interface connection to be functional e Baud rate e Serial Interface active e Remote marker range data exchange range BAUDRATE 19200B Serial Interface REMOTE MARKER BAUDRATE 19200B Serial Interface v REMOTE MARKER READ 1mMD11 1MD015 WRITE 1mMD16 1MD18 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 19 Baud rate Serial Interface The baud rate can be 9600 baud or 19200 baud IMPORTANT In normal applications select the higher baud rate of 19200 baud The baud rate of 9600 baud should only be selected if the connection is frequently faulty Factory setting 9600 baud Activating Serial Interface Serial Interface must be
91. 0947 AC 15 250V ac 3A 600 Ops h 300 000 switch operations DC 13 L R lt 150 ms 24V de 1A 500 Ops h 200 000 switch operations Breaking capacity IEC 60947 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 12 Specifications Table A 11 GFX I O Modules Relay Output Specifications Specification AC 15 250V ac 3A 600 Ops h 1760 1A12XOW4l 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 1760 OW2 300 000 switch operations DC 13 L R lt 150 ms 24V dc 1A 500 Ops h 200 000 switch operations Filament lamp load 1000 W at 230 240V ac 25 000 switch operations 500 W at 115 120V ac 25 000 switch operations Fluorescent tube with ballast 10 x 58 W at 230 240V ac 25 000 switch operations Conventional fluorescent tube compensated 1 x 58 W at 230 240V ac 25 000 switch operations Conventional fluorescent tube uncompensated 10 x 58 W at 230 240V ac 25 000 switch operations Operating frequency relays Mechanical switch operations 10 million 107 switch operations Mechanical switching frequency 10 Hz Resistive lamp load 2 Hz Inductive load l Table A 12 UL CSA Relay Ratings 0 5 Hz Uninterrupted current at 240V ac 24V dc 10A 8A AC Control Circuit Rating Codes utilization category B300 Light Pilot Duty Max rated operational voltage 300V ac Max thermal uninterrupted current cos 1 5A at B300 Maximum make
92. 1 An arithmetic function block is not wired in the circuit diagram Parameter display and parameter set for arithmetic function blocks AR32 ADD gt I1 res AR32 Arithmetic function block number 32 ADD Addition mode Appears in the parameter display gt I1 First value gt I2 Second value QV gt Result of the addition Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 45 Arithmetic Function Block Modes Parameter Function ADD Addition of summand value gt z1 plus summand gt 12 SUB Subtraction of minuend gt 11 minus subtrahend gt z2 MUL Multiplication of factor gt z2 by factor gt 12 DIV Division of dividend gt z1 by divisor gt z2 Value Range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147483 647 Behavior when value range is exceeded e The function block sets the switching contact AR CY to status 1 e The function block retains the value of the last valid operation The value is zero when it is first called Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts AROICY to AR32CY CARRY overflow bit value on function block output greater than or less than the value range ARO1ZE to AR32ZE ZERO zero bit value on function block output is equal to zero Coils The arithmetic function block do
93. 1 132194 00000000000000000011 0011 10100011 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 68 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Value gt 12 Omitted Result ov gt 13 220 gee 111111111111 1111110011000101 1100 The NOT sequence operates according to the following rules gt I1 positive value Negate value of gt 11 and subtract 1 gt z1 1 gt 12 gt 11 Negative value Value of gt 11 and subtract 1 gt r1 1 gt 12 Counters Pico GFX 70 provides 32 up down counters from C 01 to C 32 The counter relays allow you to count events You can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value To specify a start value for example counting from the value 1200 this can be implemented using a C counter The C counters are cycle time dependent Wiring of a Counter You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts Tanita T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 69 Figure 4 29 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with counter relay QAAAAHHHH N o e rj E I i i 1 Li i Li I i Li I Li T Li I 1 i Li 1 Li T Li I zZBooo aaaa o B Parameter Display and Parameter Set fo
94. 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 14 Overview Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Main Menu with Password Protection Password entry Password Status display Four wrong entries if enabled DELETE ALL Correct entry Access the system menu by simultaneously pressing DEL Main menu Unlocking Pico GFX 70 PASSWORD A gt _ gt STOP RUNY PARAMETERS SET CLOCK v PASSWORD RIUN Pico GFX 70 System Menu TIP and ALT Password System SECURITY PASSWORD SYSTEM RANGE MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR Change delete Password Password entry ENTER PASSWORD ACTIVATE PW CHANGE PW OPERATING MODEV INTERFACE DELETE FUNCTION ACTIVATE PW ENTER PASSWORD ACTIVATE PW CHANGE PW ee CHANGE PW PASSWORD PROGRAM Y PROGRAM Y RANGE PARAMETERS PARAMETERS TIME TIME OPERATINGMODEV V INTERFACE DELETE FUNCTIONY System menu Overview 1 15 SECURITY SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR DEBOUNCE 4 P BUTTONS RUN MODE DEBOUNCE P BUTTONS V RUN MODE Retention only in STOP mode CARD MODE CARD MODEY YV TERMINAL MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY DISPLAY RETENTION RETENTION INFORMATION INFORMATION DEBOUNCE P_ BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE a TERMINAL MODE ONRAST 6 DISPLA
95. 1EP to DC32EP Activate proportional component e DCO1EI to DC32EI Activate integral component Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 99 e DCO1ED to DC32ED Activate the differential component e DCO1SE to DC32SE Activate the manual manipulated variable Memory Requirement of the PID Controller The PID controller function block requires 96 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the PID Controller Function Block The PID controller works on the basis of the PID algorithm According to this the manipulated variable Y t is the result of the calculation of the proportional component an integral component and a differential component IMPORTANT The PID controller must be enabled so that it can work Coil DC EN is active If coil DC EN is not active the entire PID controller is deactivated and reset The manipulated variable is set to zero The corresponding coils for the P I and D components must be active Example If only coils DC EP and DC EI are activated the controller operates as a PI controller TMG be device calculates the manipulated variable every time the scan time T has elapsed If the scan time is zero the manipulated variable is calculated every cycle Equation of PID controller Y Yp t Yi Yo Y t calculated manipulated variable with scan time t Yp t Value of the proportional component of the manipulated variable with scan time t Y t Valu
96. 2005 Memory Requirement of the Operating Hours Counter The operating hours counter function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the Operating Hours Counter Function Block If the enable coil OT EN is triggered to the 1 state the counter adds the value 1 to its actual value every minute basic clock rate 1 minute If the actual value on QV gt reaches the setpoint value of gt I1 the contact OT Q1 switches for as long as the actual value is greater than or equal to the setpoint value The actual value is retained in the unit until the Reset coil OT RE is actuated The actual value is then set to zero IMPORTANT Operating mode change RUN STOP Voltage On Off Delete program Change program Load new program All these actions do not delete the actual value of the operating hours counter Accuracy The operating hours counter is accurate to the nearest minute If the enable coil signal is terminated within a minute the value for seconds is lost The value range of the operating hours counter is between 0 hours and 100 years PUT Send a Value onto the Network The function block allows you to selectively send a 32 bit value onto the network The PUT function block provides data that another Pico Link station indicates it requires via the GET function block Figure 4 56 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with PUT function block PTO1 11
97. 211t016 201to8 2R1to16 2S1to8 1 3to8RN 1 to 32 1 3 to 8 SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PT 1 to 32 3 3111016 301to8 3R1to16 3S1to8 1 2 4to 8RN 1 to 32 1 2 4to8SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PI 1 to 32 4 411t016 401to8 4R1to16 4S1to8 1to3 5to8RN1to 1to3 5to8SN1to GI 1 to 32 PI 1 to 32 32 32 5 511t016 501t08 5R1to16 5S1to8 1to4 6to8RN1to 1to4 6to8SN1to GT1to32 PT 1 to 32 32 32 6 611t016 601to8 6R1t016 6S1to8 1to5 7 8RN 1 to 32 1to 5 7 8SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PT 1 to 32 7 711t016 701to8 7R1to16 7S1to8 1to6 8RN 1 to 32 1 to 6 8 SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PT 1 to 32 8 811t016 801to8 8R1to16 8S1to8 1to7 RN 1 to 32 1 to 7 SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PT 1 to 32 IMPORTANT Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The RN SN connection is a point to point connection between the stations indicated With RN and SN the number of the contact must have the same number as the coil Example 25N30 from station 8 is sent to 8RN30 of station 2 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 5 IMPORTANT Every station with a circuit diagram has read access to the physical station inputs and outputs of other stations and can process them locally Example 1 Station 1 is to read the input I1 of station 2 and write to output Q1 of station 2 Station 2 does not have a circuit diagram Figure 6 1 Circuit diagram in station 1 Example 2 Marker M 01
98. 358 0 to 10 3 51V 5to 5 1 49V Screen 4 Screen 4 shows an example of the output of analog values here IA3 on the display which is an extension of screen 3 For greater simplicity all the basic settings of the scaling range were taken from screen 3 Note the Numerical display setting in the Display change area of the Number range format tab Table 5 20 Numerical value extended analog value output Numerical value 1 Display of the analog value 0 to 1019 Numerical value 2 Display of the analog value with the scaling range 0 to 10 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Always show sign yes Display change Detection via internal limit value comparison Numerical display flashing Display of the analog value with the scaling range 5 to 5 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Always show sign no Display change detection via internal limit value comparison Numerical value display inverted Numerical value 3 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 23 Figure 5 21 Extended analog value output Analog input I3 Figure 0 Flashing 0 00V Invert 5 00V Screen 5 Screen 5 shows an example of the output of analog values here IA3 on the display with the visibility option switched via 11 and I2 The settings for this were defined on the Visibility tab Two numerical values are shown on the screen that output the analog value in different formats These values are associ
99. 5 25 TIP In PicoSoft Pro the contents of the marker can be viewed both in decimal and hexadecimal format Only decimal format however is shown in the display Screen 9 Screen 9 shows an example of how to display a value overflow The associated variable is the QV output of timing relay T04 The variable type is DWord The timing relay runs from 0 to 4000 ms A value range from 0 to 3000 and ms as unit of measure are defined in the Number range format tab This causes a value overflow as soon as 3000 ms is exceeded This is indicated in the display by an overflow signal Screen 10 Screen 10 shows an example of how to display a value underflow The associated variable is the QV output of counter C02 The variable type is DWord The counter C02 is triggered by a flashing pulse from timing relay TO7 The counter counts down from 12 to 0 A value range from 6 to 12 and mm as unit of measure are defined in the Number range format tab This causes a value underflow as soon as 6 mm is undershot This is indicated in the display by an underflow signal Value Entry This screen element enables you to enter numerical setpoint values on the device during operation and thus make interventions in a process The process value is thus entered via the set variable linked in the program The Pico GFX 70 saves the entered value internally The value is processed by the program and displayed until it is modified again by the operator or the
100. ANT Extreme changes in the manipulated variable can occur when the manual manipulated variable is transferred or deactivated IMPORTANT If the function block is running in UNI unipolar mode a negative signed manipulated variable value will be output Signal Smoothing Filter Pico GFX 70 provides 32 signal smoothing filters FT01 to FT32 The function block allows you to smooth noisy input signals Wiring a Signal Smoothing Filter You can integrate a signal smoothing filter into your circuit as a coil Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 102 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Figure 4 42 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with smoothing function block EENE E EEA FT17EN Parameter Display and Parameter Set for the FT Function Block F PT1 signal smoothing filter function block number 17 Appears in the parameter display Input value Recovery time Proportional gain FT17 gt I1 zsa FT17 gt KP Qv gt t gt I1 gt TG gt KP QV gt Output value smoothed MA The recovery time T is the time in which the output value is calculated The recovery time T must be set so that it is an integer multiple of the cycle time or controller scan time Ty Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt I2 and gt xp can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03
101. Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 A02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 JA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 98 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Value Range for Inputs and Outputs Value range Resolution unit gt l1 Setpoint of PID controller 32768 to 32767 gt l 2 Actual value of PID controller 32768 to 32767 gt KP Proportional gain Kp 0 to 65535 in gt N Reset time Th 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt TV_ Rate time Ty 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt TC Scan time 0 to 65535 in 100 ms gt MV_ Manual manipulated variable 4096 to 4095 QV gt Manipulated variable 0 to 4095 unipolar 4096 to 4095 bipolar Example Value at input Value processed in the function block gt KP Proportional gain Kp 1500 15 gt N_ Reset time Th 250 25s gt TV_ Rate time T 200 20s gt TC Scan time 500 50s gt MV Manual manipulated variable 500 500 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts DCOI1LI to DC32L1 value range of the manipulated variable exceeded Coils e DCO1EN to DC32EN Enable PID controller e DCO
102. B EN P March 2005 The function blocks are used to simulate some of the devices used in conventional open loop and closed loop control systems Pico GFX 70 provides the following function blocks e Analog value comparator threshold controller only with Pico GFX 70 24V dc variants e Arithmetic addition subtraction multiplication division e Compare data blocks e Transfer data blocks e Boolean sequences e Counters up and down counters with upper and lower threshold values preset frequency counters high speed counters incremental encoder counters e Comparators e Text output freely editable texts enter values e Data function block e PID controllers e Smoothing filters e Value scaling e Pulse width modulator Read GET Pico Link data e Time switches weekday time year month day date e Numerical converters e Master reset e Operating hours counter e Write PUT Pico Link data e Synchronization of date and time via the Pico Link e Timing relays on delayed on delayed with random switching off delayed also retriggerable off delayed with random switching also retriggerable on and off delayed on and off delayed with random switching Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 39 single pulse synchronous flashing asynchronous flashing e Set cycle time e Value limitation The following applies to function blocks IMPORTANT The most recent actual values ar
103. C interface memory module the Pico Link network expansion 1 0 Yes To supply voltage No Between each other No To the outputs Yes To PC interface memory module the Pico Link network expansion 1 0 Yes To the digital inputs No To the outputs Yes To the Pico Link network Yes Cable Length unshielded 100 m 328 ft 60 m 197 ft Number of analog inputs 17 18 111 112 4 0 Input type DC voltage 7 Signal range 0 to 10V de Resolution analog 0 01V Resolution digital 10 bit 0 to 1023 counts Input impedance 11 2K Q Accuracy Two GFX devices from actual value 3 Within a unit from actual value 17 18 111 112 2 Input current lt 1imA Conversion time analog to digital Debounce On 20 ms 7 Debounce OFF each cycle time Electrical Isolation To supply voltage No S Cable Length unshielded Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 30 m 98 ft Specifications A 11 Table A 10 GFX 1 0 Modules Input Specifications Specification Number of high speed inputs 11 12 13 14 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW410F 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB410F 4 1760 IA12XOW4l High speed up and down counters Frequency lt 3 kHz Pulse shape square wave Frequency counters Frequency lt 3 kHz Pulse shape square wave Incremental counter encoder Frequency lt 3 kHz Pulse shape square wave Counter inputs 11 and 12 13 and 14 2
104. C01 reaches its upper setpoint with this value this starts the on delayed timing relay T08 This then resets the counter C01 to 0 after the set time of 0 8 s has elapsed This loop is repeated continuously Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Two messages in screen_automatic screen change default e60 Screen 1 The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display Screen 2 The second screen contains a message text element with two message texts The message texts are activated via counter values 1 and 4 A default text default has also been defined Status value 1 Error message text e Status value 2 and 3 default as default text Status value 4 RESTART message text If the status value of C01 is 1 the message error flashes as the function block parameter FB has been set in the Display change area in the Display change tab The function block parameter switches if the SL value ower switch threshold of the counter is reached refer to PicoSoft Pro function block editor counter C01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 36 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 5 40 Message text with default text Error default RESTART Message Text Example Program 5 Several Message Texts in One Text Element
105. EN P March 2005 Commissioning 3 11 Figure 3 7 Power flow display Input 11 is closed input 12 is open relay 01 has picked up L 1 C 1 RUN visible area 3 Press ESC to return to the Status display TIP With Pico GFX 70 you can test parts of a circuit diagram before it is entirely completed Pico GFX 70 simply ignores any incomplete wiring that is not yet working and only runs the finished wiring Power Flow Display with Zoom Function The Pico GFX 70 enables you to check the following at a glance e all four contacts plus one coil in series e and 3 circuit connections Change to the Circuit diagram display and press the ALT button Press push button actuator S1 Figure 3 8 Power flow display in Zoom function Input 11 and I2 are closed relay 01 picked up I Contact closed coil is triggered O Contact opened coil dropped out 1 Press push button actuator S2 that has been connected as a break contact The circuit connection is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 12 Commissioning Use the arrow keys to move between the contacts or coil 2 Press the up cursor button The cursor moves to the second contact 3 Press the ALT button The display changes to display status with contact and or coil designation Figure 3 9 Power flow display Input 11 is closed input 12 is open relay 01 has dropped out
106. Expanding inputs 2 40 Expanding outputs 2 40 Expansion Local 2 40 F Features 1 4 for 8 5 Frequency counters 4 5 Function blocks Evaluating 8 2 List A 17 Function relay Counter relay 4 85 Counter high speed 4 79 Counter high speed incremental encoder 4 85 Counters 4 68 Example 4 154 Frequency counters 4 75 Overview 4 38 Time switch 4 106 4 111 Timing relay 4 139 G GFX Evaluating the circuit diagram 8 1 Operating modes 3 2 Impulse relay 4 34 Increasing the input current 2 22 Incremental encoder 2 27 4 85 Input contacts 4 18 Inrush current limitation 2 23 Interface 8 10 Interference 2 21 Inverting 4 21 J Jumps 4 119 K Keypad 1 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 L Latching 4 34 Latching relay 4 35 LED display 1 11 Main menu Overview 1 12 Selection 1 9 Make contact 4 4 Inverting 4 21 manuals related P 2 Marker relay 8 4 Memory card Insertion 8 12 Memory management Program memory 8 4 RAM 8 4 Menu Changing level 3 5 Changing the language 7 8 Language setting 3 1 6 2 Operator guidance 1 8 Message INVALID PROG 8 14 8 15 Mode Changing 3 10 Mounting Display operating unit 2 6 Inputs outputs onto the processor unit 2 10 On top hat rail 2 13 Processor unit 2 8 Protective cover 2 3 Protective membrane 2 2 Screw fixing 2 14 Top hat rail 2 8 Mounting feet 2 14 N Network Addressing 6 3 Automatic change of the RUN and STOP mode 6 9 Cables 2 36 Changing the write repetit
107. F signal OV ac to 40V ac e ON signal 79V ac to 264V ac Input current e R1 to R12 0 5 mA 0 25 mA at 230V ac 115V ac Cable Lengths Severe interference can cause a 1 signal on the inputs without a proper signal being applied Observe therefore the following maximum cable lengths e R1 to R12 40m without additional circuit The following applies to expansion units With longer cables connect a diode e g 1N4007 for 1A minimum 1 000V reverse voltage in series to the input Ensure that the diode is pointing towards the input as shown in the circuit diagram otherwise the module will not detect the 1 state Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 22 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 2 22 1760 IB12X0B8 with a diode on the inputs QQ COOGOSOOYY OOVYSOOS E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 L N N L 100 240 V Two wite proximity switches have a residual current with the 0 state If this P y residual current is too high the input may detect a 1 signal If inputs with a higher input current are required an additional input circuit must be used Increasing the Input Current The following input circuit can be used in order to prevent interference and also when using two wire proximity switches Figure 2 23 Increasing the input current Ti A o 100 nF 275 V h gp Y SO TE N eee E E R1 R2 R3
108. GFX 70 makes its keypad and display available to the other device for use Two Pico GFX 70 devices can be connected simply via the serial interfaces Circuit diagrams are connected up using ladder diagrams and each element is entered directly via the Pico GFX 70 display For example you can connect make and break contacts in series and in parallel switch output relays and auxiliary contacts define outputs as coils impulse relays rising or falling edge triggered relays or as latching relays select timing relays with different functions on delayed on delayed with random switching off delayed off delayed with random switching on and off delayed on and off delayed with random switching on and off delayed with random switching single pulse synchronous flashing asynchronous flashing use up and down counters count high speed signals up and down counters with upper and lower limit values Overview 1 3 preset frequency counters high speed counters count incremental encoder values compare values e display graphics texts variables enter set points display flashing values and graphics change and replace graphics and texts by push button process additional inputs and outputs use 7 day and year time switches count operating hours operating hours counter e communicate via the Pico Link set up point to point communication via the s
109. IGURATOR CONFIGURATION IN CONFIGURE PROGRESS Fault scenario ERR ID CONFLICT with ID conflict OVERWRITE CONFIGURATION Fault scenario with ERR TIME OUT network fault Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 18 Overview Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 System menu NET BAUDRATE 9600B BAUDRATE 19200B COM SERIAL INTERFACE SERIAL INTERFACE CONFIGURE v REMOTE MARKER BAUDRATE 19200B READ COM LINK v 1MD00 1MD00 REMOTE MARKER WRITE 1MD00 1MD00 This menu only appears if the COM LINK was selected Selecting or Toggling Between Menu Items decimate Up or down arrow button STOP PARAMETERS SET CLOCK i Ae Cok Select or toggle Cursor Display The cursor flashes HH MM 4 23 DD MM 05 05 l YEAR 2003 Full cursor Wi e Move cursor with left and right arrow keys e In circuit diagram also with up and down arrow keys HH MM 14 23 Value M M DD MM 05 05 THAR A002 e Change position with left and right arrow keys e Change values with up and down arrow keys Flashing values menus are shown in grey in this manual Overview 1 19 Setting Values see ner er e Change value using up down arrow DD MM 03 10 gt keys YEAR 200 e Select cursor position in value using aan le
110. If the program on the memory module is different to the program in Pico GFX 70 the program from the card is loaded into the processor and the processor starts in the RUN mode Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GFX 70 on page 7 5 Activation of Card Mode Requirement RUN MODE is active If Pico GFX 70 displays carp mope Z this means that when the power supply is switched on Pico GFX 70 will only start in RUN mode if a memory module with a valid program has been inserted 1 Otherwise select carp mone and press OK Pico GFX 70 will start up with the program on the card 2 Press ESC to return to the Status display DEBOUNCE P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE y Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 19 Deactivation of Card Mode 1 Select carp MODE V 2 Press OK The RUN mode function is deactivated The Pico GFX 70 default setting is for display of the CARD MODE menu i e Pico GFX 70 starts in RUN mode without the memory module when the power is switched on Terminal Mode The Pico GFX 70 also supports the TERMINAL MODE Terminal mode enables the display and the keypad of the GFX to be used as a terminal for operating another device In this operating mode you are thus able to remotely control all devices supporting Terminal mode operation The interface to the other device can be i
111. MB e Analog output QA01 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts BV01ZE to BV32ZE ZERO zero bit value on output function block is equal to zero Coils The Boolean sequence function block does not have coils Memory Requirement for the Boolean Sequence Function Block The Boolean sequence function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Function of Boolean Sequence Function Block Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 67 The function block creates the sequence depending on the operating mode IMPORTANT If you sequence a negative value e g 10g the processor unit will form the two s complement of the amount Example 10 gee 10000000 000000000000 00000000101 0pin Two s complement 11111111111111111111111111110110 FF FFFFF6 Bit 32 is the signed bit and remains as 1 AND Boolean Sequence Value gt 11 13219 ge 00110011 1010001 1p in Value gt 12 57193 ge 1101111101101001 Result v gt 4897 qec 00010011 00100001 OR Boolean Sequence Value gt 11 13219 gee 00110011 1010001 1p in Value gt 12 57193 ge 1101111101101001 4 4 Result ov gt 65515 gee 1111 111111101011 XOR Boolean Sequence Value gt 11 13219 ge 00110011 10100011 Value gt 12 57193 gee 1101111101101001 4 4 Result v gt 60618 ge 1110110011001010 pin NOT Boolean Sequence Value gt 1
112. ORTANT Values greater than 161061273 are output as 9999999 Values less than 161061273 are output as 9999999 The working range of the function block has been exceeded BIN Mode The decimal value is assigned to input gt 11 The decimal value is represented as a BCD coded value The BCD coded value is interpreted as a hexadecimal value and output as a decimal value at output QV gt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 128 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example 1 Input value gt I1 7 ge BCD binary value 0111 Hexadecimal value 0111 Decimal value QV gt 7 Example 2 Input value gt I1 11 9 BCD binary value 00010001 Hexadecimal value 00010001 Decimal value QV gt 17 1 16 Hexadecimal value Bit 0 has the value 1 Bit 4 has the value 16 Total Bit 0 plus Bit 4 17 Example 3 Input value gt I1 194ec BCD binary value 00011001 Hexadecimal value 0001 1001 Decimal value QV gt 25 1 8 16 Example 4 Input value gt 11 99999994 BCD binary value 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 Hexadecimal value 10011001 1001 1001 1001 10011001 Decimal value QV gt 161061273 Example 5 Input value gt 11 616734 BCD binary value 10000000000001100001 011001110011 Hexadecimal value 10000000000001100001 011001110011 Decimal value QV gt 398963 IMPORTANT Bit 32 is the sign bit Bit 32 1 Sign Minus oTo4 Qv gt
113. P March 2005 PASSWORD STOP RUN V PASSWORD SET CLOCK ENTER PASSWORD XXXXXX PROGRAM STOP PARAMETERS SET CLOCK Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 5 You must unlock Pico GFX 70 with the password before you implement a protected function enter a protected menu or the System menu Unlocking Pico GFX 70 Unlocking Pico GFX 70 will deactivate the password You can reactivate password protection later via the password menu or by switching the power supply off and on again 1 Press OK to switch to the main menu The PASSWORD entry will flash 2 Press OK to enter the password entry menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 shows PROGRAM in the main menu instead of PASSWORD this means that there is no password protection active Pico GFX 70 will display the password entry field 3 Set the password using the cursor buttons 4 Confirm with OK If the password is correct Pico GFX 70 will return automatically to the Status display The PROGRAM menu option is now accessible so that you can edit your circuit diagram The System menu is also accessible Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 6 Pico GFX 70 Settings CHANGE PW ACTIVATE PW ENTER PASSWORD XXXXXX ENTER PASSWORD 100005 ENTER PASSWORD Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Changing or Deleting the Password Range 1 Unlock the Pico GFX 70 2
114. PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts e C 010F to C 320F Actual value 2 upper set point e C O1FB to C 32FB Actual value Lower set point value e C O1ZE to C 32ZE Actual value zero e COICY to C 32CY Value range exceeded Coils e C01C_ to C 32C_ counter coils count with rising edge e C01D_ to C 32D_ count direction definition status 0 count upwards status 1 count downwards e COIRE to C 32RE Reset actual value to zero e C OISE to C 32SE accept defined actual value with rising edge Memory Requirement of the Counter Relay The counter relay function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 71 Retention Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM RETENTION menu The retentive actual value requires 4 bytes of memory If a counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off If Pico GFX 70 is started in RUN mode the counter relay operates with the retentively saved actual value Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 72 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Function of the Counter Function Block Figure 4 30 Signal diagram of counter 1 counter co
115. PORTANT The transfer is in byte format MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes 18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length The error message Number of elements exceeds the destination range is output BTO1E1 is 1 Example Comparison of marker blocks range overlap error 12 bytes are to be copied starting from MW60 MW64 is specified as destination address Parameters of BT01 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 mw60 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 64 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Comparison range 2 gt 12 Mw64 Number of bytes gt No 12 Taree The copy operation is in byte format MW60 to MW64 is 8 bytes The number of bytes is 12 bytes The error message Both ranges overlap is output BCO1E2 is 1 Example Copying of marker bytes invalid offset error The value of marker word MW40 is to be copied to MW54 and subsequent marker words The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BTO1 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 mw4o Comparison range 2 gt 12 mw54 Number of bytes gt No c orQv IMPORTANT The value of C 01QV is 10042 This value is too big The value at gt no can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the destination range is outside of the permissible range is output BTO01E3 is 1 Boolean Operations Pico GFX 70 provides 32 function blocks from BV01 to BV32 for Boolean oper
116. Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 3 Open the password menu via the menu option SECURITY and PASSWORD The CHANGE PW entry will flash Pico GFX 70 will only show this password menu if a password is present 4 Press OK to enter the password entry menu 5 Use OK to move to the 6 digit entry field 6 The current password will be displayed 7 Modify the six password digits using the cursor buttons 8 Confirm with OK 9 Use ESC to exit the security area Deleting Use number combination 000000 to delete a password If a password has not been entered already Pico GFX 70 will show six dashes ENTER PASSWORD XXXXXX DELETE ALL Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 7 Password Incorrect or No Longer Known If you no longer know the exact password you can try to re enter the password several times IMPORTANT The DELETE FUNCTION has not been deactivated You have entered an incorrect password Re enter the password After the fourth entry attempt Pico GFX 70 will ask whether you wish to delete the circuit diagram and data Press ESC No entry will be deleted OK Circuit diagram data and password are deleted Pico GFX 70 will return to the Status display IMPORTANT If you no longer know the exact password you can press OK to unlock the protected Pico GFX 70 The saved circuit diagram and all function relay parameters will be lost Pressing ESC will retain th
117. Press ESC Use the arrow buttons to select the SEARCH menu A SEARGHE V 2 Press OK 3 Select the desired contact coil and number I 01 I 02 Q 01 H 0191 With function relays select the function block the number and the coil SEARCH Toa 4 Confirm the search with the OK button Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 25 I 01 I 02 Q 01 HY01Q1 L 1 C 1 B 7140 I 01 I 02 Q 01 HY01Q1 L 1 C 1 B 7140 H 01 I 02 Q 01 HY01Q1 L 1 C 1 B 7140 The device will search for the first occurrence of the contact or coil from the start of the search to the end of the circuit diagram If no contact or coil is found the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram editor will continue the search from the start of the circuit diagram If a contact or coil is found the Pico GFX 70 editor automatically jumps to the respective field in the circuit diagram Go To a Circuit Connection The Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram editor provides a Go To function to enable fast access to a circuit connection 1 2 Press ESC and use the arrow keys to select the GO TO menu Press OK Select the required circuit connection L The first contact on the circuit connection is always indicated Press OK The cursor remains stationary at the required circuit connection contact L1 Deleting the Circuit Connection Pico GFX 70 only remov
118. Q1 X 01 32 4 92 Data function block DB X Q1 DB X Q1 X 01 32 4 93 PID controller value range of DC X LI DC X LI X 01 32 4 95 manipulated variable exceeded Receive a variable from a station Get GT X Q1 GT X Q1 X 01 32 4 95 Seven day time switch HW X Q1 HW X Q1 X 01 32 4 106 Year time switch function block HY X Q1 HY X Q1 X 01 32 4 111 Master reset sets all outputs and MR X Q1 MR X Q1 X 01 32 4 122 markers to zero state Operating hours counter function OT X Q1 OT X Q1 X 01 04 4 129 block set time reached Operating hours counter value OT X CY OT X CY X 01 04 4 129 overflow CARRY Send a variable to the network PT X Q1 PT X Q1 X 01 32 4 130 enable active Put Pulse width modulation error PW X E1 PW X E1 X 01 02 4 132 minimum on or off time exceeded Send date and time via the Pico Link SC X Q1 S5C xX Q1 X 0 4 135 network function block Timing relay function block T X Q1 T X Q1 X 01 32 4 139 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 9 Usable Relays and Function Blocks coils Pico GFX 70 provides various relay types as well as function blocks and their coils for wiring in a circuit diagram Table 4 3 Usable Relays and Function Blocks Coils Relay function block Pico Number Coil Parameter GFX 70 display Outputs Pico GFX 70 output relays network Q 01 08 y stations only network master Station address 2 to 8 Pico GFX 70
119. RAM FUNCTION RELAYS Circuit diagram PARAMETERS CARD SET CLOCK v TERMINAL MODE Parameter i display P SAVE amp CANCEL A Parameters SEARCH amp GOTO A v CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FUNCTION RELAYS SAVE A CANCEL A SEARCH A GOTO A v PROGRAM DELETE PROGRAM DELETE CARD Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Overview 1 13 Main menu PROGRAM DELETE PROGRAM CARD DEVICE CARD gt REPLACE CARD DEVICE DELETE CARD PROGRAM A STOP RUN V DEVICE CARD PARAMETERS CARD DEVICE REPLACE SET CLOCK V DELETE CARD TERMINAL MODE DEVICE CARD CARD DEVICE Parameter display DELETE CARD DELETE PROGRAM A STOP RUN JV PARAMETERS Parameters SET CLOCK V TERMINAL MODE PROGRAM A Display for date and STOP RUN V time setting PARAMETERS SET CLOCK V gt SET CLOCK HH MM 14 23 TERMINAL MODE DST SETTING DD MM 03 10 YEAR 2001 SET CLOCK NONE SUMMERTIME START DST SETTING MANUAL 4 DD MM EU V SUMMERTIME END GB V DD MM us Vv Only one selection is possible PROGRAM STOP RUN Y A PARAMETERS Connection Satie tries STATION ID 0 establishment TERMINAL MODE gt START MODE in progress Publication
120. RE reset coil e T O1ST to T 32ST stop coil Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 143 Memory Requirement of the Timing Relay The time relay function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Retention Timing relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive timing relays can be selected in the SYSTEM RETENTION menu If a timing relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off If Pico GFX 70 is started in RUN mode the timing relay operates with the retentively saved actual value The state of the trigger pulse must correspond to the function of the timing relay 1 signal when on delayed e single pulse e flashing 0 status for off delayed Function of the Timing Relay Function Block Timing relay on delayed with and without random switching Random switching The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the setpoint value range Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 144 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 4 66 Signal diagram of timing relay on delayed with and without random switching i N 1 trigger coil T EN 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 t setpoint time e Range A The se
121. RTANT The digital inputs must have the same voltage as the power supply of the GFX Figure 2 26 1760 IB12X0B8 LO1 e 12 QQ COSOQOVSOGY OOOOYVO E E R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 RI R10 R11 R12 24V 0V OV L 24V Installation 2 25 Connecting Analog Inputs Inputs I7 18 111 and 112 can also be used to connect analog voltages ranging from OV dc to 10V de The following applies e 17 IA01 e 18 IA02 e 111 IA03 112 IA04 The resolution is 10 bit 0 to 1023 ATTENTION Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals Consequently more care must be taken when laying and connecting the signal lines Incorrect switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly e Use shielded twisted pair cables to prevent interference with the analog signals For short cable lengths ground the shield at both ends using a large contact area If the cable length exceeds 30m or so grounding at both ends can result in equalization currents between the two grounding points and thus in the interference of analog signals In this case only ground the cable at one end Do not lay signal lines parallel to power cables Connect inductive loads to be switched via the Pico GFX 70 outputs to a separate power feed or use a suppressor circuit for motors and valves If loads such as motors solenoid valves or contactors are operated with Pico GFX 70 via the s
122. RTANT The minimum time setting for the period duration is 0 005 s 5 ms Inputs The function block inputs gt sv gt pp and gt me can be assigned the following operands Constants Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 JA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 134 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts PWO1E1 to PW02E1 the minimum on duration or the minimum off duration was undershot Coils PWO1EN to PWO2EN enable coil Memory Requirement of the Function Block The pulse width modulation function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the Pulse Width Modulation Function Block IMPORTANT The pulse width modulation function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil PW EN is active If coil PW EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero The manipulated variable at function block input gt SV is converted to a pulse string with a constant period duration The pulse width is proportional to the manipulated variable gt SV The period duration and the minimum on dur
123. RUN or STOP mode when the power is switched on Setting LCD Contrast and The backlight of the LCD display can be set to one of five stages to adapt it to Backlight local conditions The display contrast can be set to one of five stages The contrast and backlight settings are implemented as device settings 1 Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If GFX is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GFX 70 on 7 5 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 SECURITY A SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR V RUN MODE A CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY v CONTRAST dj LIGHTING 75 CONTRAST 1 LIGHTING 75 CONTRAST a LIGHTING 75 CONTRAST 1 LIGHTING 75 E CONTRAST 1 LIGHTING 75 CONTRAST 1 LIGHTING 100 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 21 2 Select the SYSTEM menu 3 Press the OK button 4 Use the down arrow button to select the DISPLAY menu and press OK The menus for setting the contrast and backlight are displayed 5 Press the OK button and move to the contrast entry field Use the up and down arrow buttons to set the contrast to a value between 2 and 2 6 Select your setting 7 Complete your setting by pressing OK The contrast setting will be retained until it is modified 8 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move to the LIGHTING menu 9 Pres
124. Select SET CLOCK from the main menu This will open the menu for setting the time SET CLOCK aad 2 Select the DST SETTING menu option Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 NONE A MANUAL EU GB v us SUMMERTIME START DD MM 00 00 SUMMERTIME END DD MM 00 00 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 13 Selecting DST Pico GFX 70 shows you the options for the DST change The standard setting is NONE for automatic DST changeover Tick at NONE 1 Select the required variant 2 Press the OK button Manual selection You want to enter your own date IMPORTANT The following applies to Pico GFX 70 devices The time change algorithm always calculates the date from the year 2000 Enter the time change for the year 2000 1 Proceed to the MANUAL menu and press 2 x OK Left and right arrow keys to move between the parameters Up and down arrow keys to change the value OK Save day and time ESC Retain previous setting 2 Press ESC to leave the display 3 Select the day and time at which summer time is to commence 4 Select the day and time at which summer time is to end MA The same time for conversion applies as for the legally determined variants EU GB US Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 14 Pico GFX 70 Settings Activating Input Delay debounce DEBOUNCE V A P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE v DEBOUNCE A P BUTTONS RUN MODE
125. Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program System language_automatic screen change e60 Figure 5 8 Date display with different country settings Screen 4 Screen 7 Country Country setting setting Spanish Portuguese MI 01 10 03 QU 01 10 03 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 15 Bitmap The bitmap screen element makes it possible to display graphics in the Pico GFX 70 display that you have made yourself or have purchased Display and visibility can change during operation To do this you need to associate the bitmap graphics with Boolean variables PicoSoft Pro supports the following bitmap graphic formats e Windows Bitmap format bmp e JPEG format jpg e Tiff format tif e Icons ico The formats are converted to monochrome format using suitable conversion procedures and then saved accordingly in the program The size and position of the bitmap graphic can be modified later in the Screen Editor IMPORTANT Bitmap graphics require a large amount of memory Overlaid bitmaps are also stored fully in the memory The more bitmaps are used use the more the cycle time will be increased considerably due to the additional memory requirement This may possibly lead to program malfunctions e g loss of count pulses Black and white graphics should be used ideally These should be between 16 x 16 and 32 x 32 pixels in size Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse butt
126. Starting Point Status Display 3 5 section Added TIP on how to reinitialize the display 3 32 Added IMPORTANT note about only writing the markers once 4 14 Modified text in the High Speed Functions section 4 74 Added IMPORTANT in the Function of the GET Function Block section 4 106 Modified text within the Function of the Year Time Switch Function Block 4 113 section Added text within the Accuracy section Modified text within the IMPORTANT statement Changed value for seconds time range in Table 4 65 Time Range Modified and added text within the Variable Setpoint Values section aa a eee el e gt Modified title for Figure 4 68 Signal diagram of timing relay off delayed with without random switching with without retriggering Modified title for Figure 4 69 Signal diagram of timing relay off delayed 4 147 with without random switching with without retriggering Totally new version of Chapter 5 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Summary of Changes 5 For this New Information See Modified text within the Memory Module section 8 11 Modified text within the PicoSoft Pro section 8 15 Modified the Device Version section 8 17 Corrected dimension specifications and added new catalog numbers to A 2 tables Revised Figure A 1 Dimensions of the 1760 DU and 1760 DUB A 3 display keypad Revised Figure A 4 D
127. T es ehi Aisa a a ap A hee cg E a 5 2 Western European Character Pables piv iia nunun nnna 5 3 Screen OVERVIEW ost scree sade ee eee ees aa eaaa eaha 5 5 Seteen 10 Sane at aT EE TEE a eR 5 6 State Tert head poate eke oe E a Open 3 ho ate 5 6 Bit Display crevi ren n E oer onte E a E Tere 5 9 Datednd Pe eile hae Sedona EEE E EEA 5 12 BINA Pa iia uae eee as EE aod T a E E a iti he 5 15 INC PICA Valie ag ds Shit lids Sah Bs aw ee a eae fair arai 5 19 Va Ae oi oe etaan i eaae ashe wn a Ind te toesa 5 25 Message TORRE cis rada ee Marre oR BE Aa et 5 30 Button Editor sss essa nnii AY oo aOR I EP 5 37 Select an Operable Screen Element sag pas lattion asin aerated 5 37 Display Backioht ots lasscivess teeta a nt EEE EAA 5 37 Screen Change asio na Mie eal AE ie wae ate ata 5 37 Password kogouta sieer pi ea ee eI 5 38 Set Variable to Fixed Valtte sg 6 5 0 oie Re ead es 5 38 Tnetement Varnables seisi ten a way Secale tet Met ty alg a ar 5 38 Decrement Vafablesesace erpa oats Si Soi a 5 38 CHANGEOVER Relay oonrec ionia ratati eaei ea a ia 5 38 Chapter 6 Introduction to Pico Link 3 34 4sbagd oebieaste tee eor ited 4 6 1 Pico Link Topologies Addressing and Functions 6 2 Loop Through the Unit Wiring Method 6 2 T Connector and Spur Mines 5 35 cen han eS owe eis aks 6 2 Topology and Addressing Examples 000004 6 3 Position and Addressing of the Operands via the Pico Link 6 4 Functions of the Statio
128. The comparison result of the function block BC01 is BCO1EQ 0 the data block ranges do not have the same content MB18 are MB68 not identical Example Comparison of marker blocks definition of a marker range in a different format Two marker blocks are to be compared Block 1 starts at MB60 Block 2 at MD80 Each block is 6 bytes long Parameters of BC01 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 MB60 Comparison range 2 gt 12 MD80 Number of bytes gt No 6 TMG The comparison is in byte format MD80 has 4 bytes Therefore the first two bytes of MD81 are also compared Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 52 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Comparison Value of marker Comparison range 2 Value of marker range 2 decimal binary range 1 range 1 decimal binary MB60 45 MD80 Byte 1 LSB 1097219629 00101101 01000001011001100011 111000101101 MB61 62 MD80 Byte 2 1097219629 00111110 01000001 01100110001111100010110 MB62 102 MD80 Byte 3 1097219629 01100110 01000001 011001100011 111000101101 MB63 65 MD80 Byte 4 MSB 1097219629 0100000 01000001 011001100011 111000101101 MB64 173 MD81 Byte 1 LSB 15277 1010110 0011 101110101101 MB65 59 MD81 Byte 2 15277 0011101 0000100010101101 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The comparison result of the function block BC01 is BCO1EQ 0 the data block ranges do not have the same
129. The scaling function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil LS EN is active If coil LS EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero The function block operates according to the following equation Y x Xx Y2 Y X2x Y4 X1 X Y2 Xp Xy X2 X Y x Actual output value of target range X Actual input value of source range X Lower value of source range X Upper value of source range Y Lower value of target range Yz Upper value of target range Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 118 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Figure 4 51 Value scaling function block Reduce value range X1 X2 J Y1 Y2 1 Source range 2 Target range Figure 4 52 Value scaling function block Increase value range X1 X2 e C Y1 Y2 1 Source range 2 Target range Example 1 The source range is a 10 bit value source is the analog input IA01 The target range has 12 bits Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Lso1 gt I1 IA01 gt X1 0 gt Y1 0 gt X2 1023 gt Y2 4095 Qv gt Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 119 Parameter display and parameter set for the LSO1 function block The actual value at the analog input IA01 is 511 The scaled output value is 2045 Example 2 The source range has 12 bits The target range has 16 signed bits gt 11 DCO1QV gt x1 0 gt x2 4095
130. These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A break contact bit logic is selected here The bit display is overlaid partly with static texts Figure 5 6 Break contact logic bit display with overlaid text Bit Logic Bit Logic break contact break contact aa 22 23 Screen 5 Screen 5 illustrates the possible uses of the Visibility tab for the bit display negated with overlaid static text In this screen a bit display element has been enlarged to the full size of the screen This is activated via the Boolean operand Q1 with the break contact bit logic In this way the bit display takes on the opposite status of output Q1 In other words when Q1 is On only the frame of the bit display is visible However the visibility of the bit display is only activated with the Boolean operand Q3 as the break contact bit logic is selected The bit display is overlaid partly with static text Figure 5 7 Bit display with frame Frame Frame if Q3 active if Q3 active Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 12 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Bit Display Example Program 2 Bit Display with Automatic Screen Change This program is a copy of the program Bit display_manual screen change e60 The only difference is that the screens are activated in succession automatically screen change in the Screen overview gt S
131. Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 13 Visibility tab The visibility tab provides the option of making the screen element invisible by means of an associated variable Date and Time Example Program 1 Different Display Formats and Invisibility Option for a Screen The program consists of eight screens that can be selected via the up and down cursor buttons The screen change is defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 The language setting for all eight screens is Deutsch The first six screens show various data and time display formats The seventh screen shows all four formats at the same time and the eighth screen illustrates the invisibility function Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Date and Time_manual screen switch e60 Screen 1 Format DD MM YYYY Display in double font size therefore only day and month visible in display Screen 2 Format DD MM YYYY Display in normal font size therefore year display also visible Screen 3 Format DD MM YY HH MM Display in normal font size display of time in hours and minutes Screen 4 Format HH MM Display of hour and minute in double font size Screen 5 Format WD DD MM YY Display of weekday and date in normal font size Screen 6 Format HH MM Display of hour and minute in single font size Screen 7 Display of different formats possible in one screen Display in normal font size Screen 8 Displa
132. X The GFX feeds the interface electronics of the connection line at both ends 2 Connect both stations to the power supply Figure 3 11 Serial connection example with two stations The GFX is the active station and the second station is the remote station 3 Switch on the power supply at both stations Commissioning 3 21 4 Ensure that the power supply for both stations is switched on The POW LED must light up or flash It is only possible to configure the stations which have an active power supply 5 Go to the GFX device that is the active station running the serial interface IMPORTANT The following tasks are only possible in STOP mode Setting up the Serial Interface The GFX device can either run as a Pico Link station of as a station in a Serial Interface connection Do not switch a GFX device running as a Pico Link station to Serial Interface If this is done with the Pico Link in the RUN mode the entire Pico Link network will be deactivated There will be no further data transfer Solution 1 Deactivate the Serial Interface 2 Re enter the Pico Link address 3 Switch the power supply off and then on again 4 Reconfigure the Pico Link on station 1 1 Simultaneously press the DEL and ALT buttons with the Status display active ie The System menu appears SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE 2 Select the CONFIGURATOR menu option CONFIGURATOR 3 Press the OK butt
133. Y LIGHTING 75 RETENTION INFORMATION DEBOUNCE v P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY RETENTION MB gt MB amp INFORMATION B 200 V DEBOUNCE Y CI gt CI P BUTTONS DB gt DB RUN MODE I CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE DISPLAY E ee RETENTION INFORMATION gt DC TCA LCD NET OS LILIT CRC 63163 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 16 Overview Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 System menu ENGLISH A SECURITY DEUTSCH SYSTEM FRANCAIS Only one selection is possible MENU LANGUAGE m ESPANOL y CONFIGURATOR ITALIANO PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS SVENSKA POLSKI TURKCE SECURITY SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR NET NET PARAMETERS COM STATIONS LINK CONFIGURE The other menus of NET and COM are only shown in STOP mode Overview 1 17 System menu NET PARAMETERS NET ID A STATIONS BAUDRATE KB CONFIGURE BUSDELAY __ SEND IO A REMOTE RUN REMOTE IO NET ID 01 A BAUDRATE 1000KB BUSDELAY 08 SEND IO v Vv REMOTE RUN V NET PARAMETERS STATIONS CONFIGURATOR This list is only created in 1 1 a Station 1 2 0 3 0 a a y This st only appears if 5 0 Station 1 has been selected 6 0 y 778 SAVE A 8 0 CANCEL A lt NET PARAMETERS STATIONS CONF
134. a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Identifies information about practices or circumstances ATTENTION that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequence vA Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures Catalog Number Release History Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last release as publication 1760 UM002A EN P April 2004 To help you locate new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph The following table shows the history of the Pico GFX 70 catalog numbers Released April 2004 Released April 2005 GFX 1 0 Modules 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IA12XOW4l 1760 IB12XOW4I0F 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB4I0F Expansion 1 0 Modules 1760 IA12XOW6l 1760 IB12XOW6I 1760 IB12XOB8 1760 O0W2 Processor Units 1760 LDF 1760 LDFA 1760 LDFC 1760 LDFCA 1760 RM GFX
135. ables used must be 120 Q Calculating the Cable Length with Known Cable Resistance If the resistance of the cable per unit of length is known resistance per unit length R in Q m the entire cable resistance Ry must not exceed the following values Ry depends on the selected baud rates Baud rate Cable resistance R kBaud Q 10 to 125 lt 30 250 lt 25 500 lt 12 1000 Imax Maximum cable length in m R Total cable resistance in Q R Cable resistance per unit length in Q m max Ri H Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 36 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Calculating Cross Section with Known Cable Lengths The minimum cross section is determined for the known maximum extent of the network cable length in m 2 Smin Minimum cable cross section in mm P cy resistivity of copper if not otherwise stated 0 018 Qmm2 m Smin IX Pou 12 4 IMPORTANT If the result of the calculation does not yield a standard cross section the next larger cross section is used Calculating Length with Known Cable Cross Section The maximum cable lengths are calculated for a known conductor cross section Imax cable length in m 2 S minimum cable cross section in mm P cy resistivity of copper if not otherwise stated 0 018 Qmm2 m max SX12 4 Pou Plugging and Unplugging Network Cables Pico GFX 70 is provided with two RJ45 network sockets The
136. activated in order for it to function Factory setting not active The tick on the Serial Interface menu item indicates that Serial Interface is active Remote markers Serial Interface data exchange range IMPORTANT The REMOTE MARKER menu only opens if a tick is displayed next to Serial Interface Select the REMOTE MARKER menu option Here you can determine select and modify the data exchange range In the example the READ range was selected with the marker double words MD11 to MD15 The WRITE range consists of the marker double words MD16 to MD 18 The entire data exchange range available is the marker range MD01 to MD20 of the remote station The active station accesses these markers with 1MD The indicates the number of the marker concerned The smallest possible unit for defining a marker range is an MD marker double word Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 20 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example The read range of the active station is 1MD02 The write range of the active station is 1MD03 The read range of the remote station is therefore MD03 The write range of the remote station is MD02 Operating principle of the Serial Interface connection The active station at the Serial Interface must be in RUN mode Data can only be exchanged with the active station in RUN mode The remote station must be in RUN or STOP mode The active station
137. acts and Coils 1 Move the cursor to a contact or coil field 2 Press DEL The contact or the coil will be deleted together with any connections Changing Make Contacts to Break Contacts Every contact in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram can be defined as either a make contact or a break contact 1 Switch to Entry mode and move the cursor over the contact name 2 Press ALT The make contact will change to a break contact 3 Press OK twice to confirm the change Figure 4 7 Change contact o from make to break Creating and Modifying Connections Contacts and relay coils are connected with the arrow in the Connect mode Pico GFX 70 displays the cursor in this mode as an arrow 1 Use the arrow buttons to move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field from which you wish to create a connection IMPORTANT Do not position the cursor on the first contact field At this position the ALT button has a different function Insert circuit connection Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 22 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 Press ALT to switch to Connect mode 3 Use the left and right arrow buttons to move the diagonal arrow between the contact fields and coil fields and the up and down arrow buttons to move between circuit connections 4 Press ALT to leave Connect mode Pico GFX 70 will leave the mode automatically when you move the diagonal arrow
138. ailable per time switch channels A B C and D These channels all act on the contact of the year time switch Date Day Month Year DD MM YY Example 11 11 02 On Off Switch Points ON switch on time OFF switch off time IMPORTANT The switch on year must not be later than the switch off year Otherwise the year time switch will not function Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 113 Contacts HY01Q1 to HY32Q1 Memory Requirement for the Year Time Switch The year time switch function block requires 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per channel used Function of the Year Time Switch Function Block The year time switch can operate with ranges individual days months years or combinations Years ON 2002 to OFF 2010 means Switch on at 00 00 on 01 01 2002 and switch off at 00 00 01 01 2010 Months ON 04 to OFF 10 means Switch on at 00 00 on April 1st and switch off at 00 00 on October 1st Days ON 02 to OFF 25 means Switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd and switch off at 00 00 on the 25th Rules for the year time switch The contact switches in the defined years ON to OFF the defined months ON to OFF and in the days entered ON to OFF Time ranges must be input with two channels one for ON and one for OFE Overlapping channels The first ON date switches on and the first OFF date switches off TMP Avoid incompl
139. al 11 si s2 KI Connect make contact S2 to input terminal 12 Connect load H1 to output Q1 K1 HI X e S1 or S2 switch on H1 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram First specify which input and output terminals you wish to use in your circuit The signal states on the input terminals are detected in the circuit diagram with the input contacts I R or RN The outputs are switched in the circuit diagram with the output relays Q S or SN Entering and Changing Contacts and Relay Function Coils Contacts 1 02 An input contact is selected in the Pico GFX 70 via the contact name and contact number Contact name Contact number Example input contact Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 19 CP 01 GT Contact name Contact number Contact function 2RN 02 T Station address Contact name Contact number S Q 04 Coil function Coil name Coil number T_04 EN Coil function Coil name Coil number Function block coil S2 SN 04 Coil function Station address Coil name Coil number A contact of a function relay is assigned the name of the function block the number and the contact function Example contact of comparator function block If the contact on a network station is used the address of the station is placed before the contact name Example contact of a Pico Link station Coils With a relay coil or function block select the coil
140. aling range field and enter 0 as the minimum value and 100 as the maximum value In order for example to display the value range 0 to 120 of a timing relay in minutes 0 to 2 min enter 0 as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter min as the unit of measure Enter 0 in the activated Scaling range field as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Value entry screen element into the screen 2 Position the mouse over the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Three sizes ate available e Normal font e Double font Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as required by dragging the selection handle on the sides Set variable tab On the Set variable tab you define the Boolean variable you wish to set Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 27 Number range format tab The Number range format tab is used for defining the following e Value range e
141. alization elements in screens These elements can be inserted in the screens and are called screen elements in the following description You can use up to 255 screen elements inside one screen Due to the memory allocation of the system it is more advisable to use several screens see Memory Division on page 5 2 The following screen elements are available Static text e Bit display e Date and time e Bitmap e Numerical value e Value entry e Message text The individual screen elements are explained in the examples Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 2 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Memory Division Figure 5 1 Memory division Pico GFX 70 Screen memory Screen 5 24 KB Program memory Screen 4 Fe Screen 3 tagram Screen 2 Jee E The maximum size of the program memory is 8 KByte This memory area is used to stote the circuit diagram and also reserves enough space for displaying the largest screen 8 KB The screen memory has a total memory capacity of 24 KByte which is used in this memory area to store all the screens created It should therefore be ensured that screens have the lowest possible memory requirement so that enough space is available in the program memory for the largest screen and the circuit diagram If a circuit diagram is not required the memory requirement of the largest screen must not exceed the 8 KByte limit TIP The PicoSoft Pro status bar indicates the
142. alue goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the direction of the values positive or negative Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 74 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 High Speed Functions Pico GFX 70 provides various high speed counter functions These counter function blocks are coupled directly to the digital inputs The high speed counter functions are only available with DC inputs The following functions are possible e Frequency counters measure frequencies CF e High speed counters count high speed signals CH e Incremental encoder counters count two channel incremental encoder signals CI The high speed digital inputs are I1 to 14 The following wiring rules apply e I1 CF01 or CHO1 or CIO1 e 12 CF02 or CH02 or CI01 e 13 CF03 or CH03 or C102 e 14 CF04 or CH04 or C102 IMPORTANT Every digital input I may only be used once by the CF CH and CI function blocks The incremental encoder requires an input pair Example e I1 high speed counter CHO1 e 2 frequency counter CF02 e 13 incremental encoder channel A CI02 e 14 incremental encoder channel B CI02 Example function block list in the FUNCTION RELAYS menu cro1 CF01 CH01 All function blocks access digital input I1 Only CH01 supplies the correct value Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 75 Frequency Counters Pico GFX 70 pro
143. alue switch you can for example compare analog input values with a set point value All Pico GFX 70 DC variants have analog inputs The following comparisons are possible e Function block input gt 11 greater than or equal to equal to less than or equal to function block input gt 12 e Using the factors gt F1 and gt F2 as inputs enables you to amplify and adjust the values of the function block inputs e The gt os function block input can be used as an offset for the gt 11 input e The gt ny function block input is used for the positive and negative switching hysteresis of the input gt 12 The contact switches according to the selected comparison mode of the function block Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 41 Figure 4 25 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with analog value comparators I 01 a 0191 I 02 A 02Q1 l a 0391 Parameter dis play and parameter set for analog value comparators A 02 Function block analog value comparator number 02 GT Greater than mode Appears in the parameter display gt I1 Comparison value 1 gt F1 Gain factor for gt n gt n gt F1 x value gt I2 Comparison value 2 gt F2 Gain factor for gt 12 gt 12 gt 2 x value gt 0S Offset for the value of gt n gt HY Switching hysteresis for value 2 Value y applies to positive and negative hysteresis Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt F1 gt I2 gt F2 gt os and gt nHy c
144. ame power feed switching may give rise to interference on the analog input signals The following circuits contain examples of applications for analog value processing IMPORTANT Ensure that the reference potential is connected Connect the OV of the power supply unit for the different set point potentiometers and sensors shown in the examples to the OV terminal of the Pico GFX 70 power feed Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 26 Installation Set Point Potentiometer Figure 2 27 Set Point potentiometer set point potentiometer with upstream resistor LO1 LO2 LO1 gt 1A A 1 3 kQ 0 25 W tka2sw D E ae ov 12 V 24V OV OV aana Ep ee es ee a a aa a Ooo Bono 0 0 0 00 0 2 000 0 O0 2 13 14 16 Use a potentiometer with a resistance of greater than or equal tol kQ e g 1 kQ 0 25W Temperature Sensor Brightness Sensor 20 mA Sensor Figure 2 28 Temperature sensor brightness sensor 20 mA sensor LO1 LO2 de 24V O 0 10 V lt woh Z i ama 35 55 C L4 Out O h e 0 10V 500 Q O00 0200 0 200 0000000000 Ooo Ge 6h ey VEG ey ie ie Gi tea a aS 24V OV OV 1 12 13 14 I5 l6 I7 18 19 110 111112 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA sensors can be connected using an e
145. an have the following operands e Constants e Marker e Analog s MD MW MB inputs IA01 to A04 JA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 42 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Analog Value Comparator Operating Modes Parameter Function GT gt 11 greater than gt z2 EQ gt I1 equal to gt 12 LT gt 11 less than gt 12 Contacts A 01Q1 to A 32Q1 Memory Requirement of the Analog Value Comparator The analog value comparator function block requires 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Figure 4 26 Signal diagram of the analog value comparator 1 actual value on gt 11 2 set point value on gt 12 3 hysteresis on gt HY 4 switching contact make contact 5 offset for value gt 11 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 43 6 actual value plus offset e Range A Compare gt 11 gt gt 12 The actual value gt 11 increases The contact switches when the actual reaches the set point value The actual value changes and falls below the value of the set point value minus the hysteresis The contact goes to the normal position e Range B Compare gt 11 lt gt 12 The actual value drops The contact switches if the actual reaches t
146. anag 4 79 High Speed Incremental Encoder Counters 4 85 GompatatotS Lisiane er Pt ER aD Mp EEO S ote eatin 4 90 Text Output Function Block 2 4 i0 a rceeew date bn enn ceos 4 92 Data Function Blocks sy n ssd oes neimen s aut heer A 4 93 PIDonwoller sc spose a See anii 4 95 Signal Smoothing Milter oats Oeandeweae ra ee Oe aaa reed 4 101 GET Fetch a Value from the Network 4 104 Seven Day Lime Switches eriaren eoi eae ee ede 4 106 Veat Time Switch tc ier bie Buea ae GL ak tates 4 111 Valu Scaling n iasi wen piorsdrdtend whe het vega es ipe wo adi iiaia 4 115 WARTS ea dahl g aa A A A a A E TE 4 119 WASTER IR CSc i pernio eetan r Eroni ME EE r 4 122 Numerical CONVENES oeer aro iia E e iia Geant 4 123 Operating Hours Counter ssas ida duties oro 4 129 PUT Send a Value onto the Network 0 0000 4 130 Pulse Width Modulation iii Rates thle yeti aes 4 132 Setting Date Eines senator tino heed darn eS Saadeh 4 135 Set Cycle TIME ner mieia Ne eRe eSNG Oe NS ee 4 137 Timme Relay cash at Geese Oe ott oe P ER EA A 4 139 Wale Mimiitanonty nesar gal Ge Shea eyesore a a eye a 4 152 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table of Contents 4 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example with Timing Relay and Counter Function Block 4 154 Chapter 5 SCPCCIG ays tet Sr eh E eG et gt ee oe ee ee i 5 1 Memory DIVES
147. annels and their load 0 7A lt le QA Maximum total short circuit current 8A Peak short circuit current 16A Thermal cutout Yes Maximum switching frequency with constant resistive load Ry 100 kQ depends on program and load 40 000 switch operations hour Parallel connection of outputs with resistive load inductive load with external suppression circuit See Connecting Transistor Outputs on page 2 30 combination within a group Yes Group 1 Q1 to 04 Maximum number of outputs 4 Total maximum current 2A ATTENTION A Outputs must be actuated simultaneously and for the same time duration Status display of the outputs LCD Status display if provided Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 14 Specifications Inductive load without external suppressor circuit General explanations To 95 time in milliseconds until 95 of the stationary current is reached To 95 3 XTo65 3 XL R Table A 14 Utilization Category in Groups for 01 to 04 05 to 08 To g5 1 ms Utilization factor per group g 0 25 R 480 Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency 1500 switch operations per hour L 16 mH f 0 5 Hz Max duty factor DF 50 DC13 Utilization factor g 0 25 Togs 72 ms Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency 1500 switch operations per hour R 48 Q f 0 5 Hz L 1 15H Max duty factor DF 50 Table A 15 Utilization Category for O
148. ansfer Data Block Function Block The transfer data block function block requires 48 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block inputs Function of the Transfer Data Block Function Block The transfer data block comparator function block has two operating modes IMPORTANT No data blocks are initialized or copied if an error occurs Anti aliasing INI marker ranges There is one source range and one destination range The source range is specified at gt 11 The length of the source range is one byte The destination range is specified at gt 12 The length of the destination range is specified by the number of bytes at the gt No input The content of the source range is transferred to the marker bytes in the destination range The function block executes the transfer if there is a rising edge from 0 to 1 at the BT T_ Trigger coil The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the trigger Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 57 Example Initializing marker blocks specifying marker ranges directly The value of marker byte 10 is to be transferred to marker bytes 20 to 29 Parameters of BTO1 function block Source tange gt I1 MB10 Destination range gt 12 MB20 Number of bytes gt No 10 Source range Value of source Destination range Value of marker range destination decimal marker range decimal MB10 123 MB20 123 MB21 123 MB22 123 MB23 123
149. ards the housing 3 Let the DIN rail snap into position 4 Press the processor unit onto the fixing shaft Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 10 Installation Figure 2 13 Mounting the Processor Unit oer ay Mounting the Inputs Outputs onto the Processor Unit HN h Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Installation 2 11 IMPORTANT The inputs outputs can be mounted before or after mounting the processor unit onto the fixing shaft Removing the Inputs Outputs 1 Press the two catches together 2 Pull one side out of the catch 3 Pull the other side out of the second catch Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 12 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Remove the I O module Removing the Processor Unit The processor unit can be removed with or without the I O module IMPORTANT If there is another fixing point for the DIN rail apart from the one for the display keypad undo it Use a screwdriver with a 100 x 3 5 mm slot width 1 I
150. as mii iia ids 7 24 Displaying Device Information si cc 00d sows aces anne oeeag 7 25 Chapter 8 Fico GRR O PrO Grate Vlas tt etiam Ne A ti Me ati a MA Se 8 1 Evaluation of the High Speed Counters CF CH and CI 8 4 Memory Management of the Pico GFX 70 0004 8 4 Delay Times for Inputs and Outputs 6 icc ct vss ccitoss coir ws 8 5 Delay Times for the GFX Inputs opawsierelwen nwa ites 8 5 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table of Contents 6 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Monitoring of Short Circuit and Overload with 1760 IB12XOB8 8 7 EA le Sana doen eects eat yea Reet nd per aces 8 7 Expanding Pico GEX 70 eh ds r MA a a sce baile Ms 8 8 How is an Expansion Unit Recognized 04 8 8 Transfer Benavio wy sricxtianed bbabhassewseiubehated tating 8 9 Function Monitoring of Expansion Units 0 8 9 AAA Oo QUPUut ser eigo ta de eat aw nies ieee NG Melee Soa 8 10 Loading and Saving Prograis 04h esas pate wate wa PE Oa ho Ra 8 10 GFX without Display and Keypad 0 000005 8 10 PR PACS ie Fiat a eines ue ean abet e ee aa n Mr ata pa hs eect 8 10 Memory Modules irine onthe tate iui sy ae Re ote 8 11 PicoSoft POs ia shaban aan ie bed dein aegea a wasted ep as 8 15 D yice Versioni A Mme tga ash ow cara bte ealins Rnd aon petals 8 17 Appendix A General oai ah a dew E ee RK oo WAS Wah ak dara ee A 1 List onthe Function BlOCksy osia4 esecek sa
151. ated with analog input IA3 which provides a Word type variable for further processing Table 5 22 Numerical value analog value output with invisibility activated Numerical value 1 Display of the analog value with the scaling range 0 to 10 two decimal places Unit of measure V Volt make number invisible via Boolean operand 11 make contact bit logic Visibility tab Numerical value 2 Display of the analog value with the scaling range 5 to 5 two decimal places Unit of measure V Volt make number invisible via Boolean operand 12 make contact bit logic Visibility tab Figure 5 23 Make invisible function Invisibility via I1 via I2 1 29V Screen 6 Screen 6 shows a simple example of the display change using an external trigger In this example input I1 is the external trigger The screen contains two numerical values These are associated with the output QV of timing relay T08 which is a DWord type variable The timing relay is run in a loop from 0 to 10 seconds Table 5 24 Numerical value analog value output with display change via external trigger input General settings Value range from 0 to 11000 unit of measure s seconds scaling range from 0 to 11 two decimal places display change active detection via external trigger input Left numerical value Display of timing relay value T08 11 actuated the numerical value flashes as the external trigger is set for flashing display via
152. ation can be selected as required within the specified limits The function block causes a direct output of the pulse to the corresponding output The output image of the circuit diagram is always updated IMPORTANT The following applies if the output of a pulse width modulator is used as a coil in the circuit diagram The state of the output is not refreshed from the circuit diagram Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 135 IMPORTANT The following applies to the minimum on duration Setting Date Time The minimum on duration is the same as the minimum off duration The minimum on duration must not exceed 10 of the period duration The ratio of period duration minimum on duration P M determines which percentage of the manipulated variable has no effect The minimum on duration must be set as low as possible so that the P M ratio is as high as possible If the minimum on duration must not be too low due to the output relay the period duration must be increased accordingly The minimum on duration is 1 ms If the actual value of the pulse length is less than the minimum on duration the minimum on duration has the effect of the pulse time Note the state of the contact PW E1 If the off duration of the pulse is less than the minimum off duration outputs Q1 and Q2 are continuously in operation Note the state of the contact PW E1 This function block allows you to selectively place the date and time onto the network All other s
153. ation 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Memory Requirement of the 7 Day Time Switch The 7 day time switch function block requires 68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per channel used Function of the 7 Day Time Switch The switching points are defined according to the parameters entered MO to FR on the weekdays Mo Tu We Th Fr ON 10 00 OFF 18 00 on and off switching times for the individual days of the week MO every Monday ON 10 00 switch on time SA every Saturday OFF 18 00 switch off time Switching on working days Time switch HW01 switches on Monday to Friday between 6 30 and 9 30 and between 17 00 and 22 30 HW01 A HW01 B gt DY1 MO gt DY1 MO gt DY2 FR gt DY2 FR gt ON 06 30 gt ON 17 00 gt OFF 09 30 gt OFF 22 30 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 109 Switching at the weekend Time switch HW02 switches on at 16 00 on Friday and switches off at 6 00 on Monday HW02 A HW02 B gt DY1 FR gt DY1 MO gt DY2 gt DY2 gt ON 16 00 gt ON gt OFF gt OFF 06 00 Figure 4 46 Signal diagram of weekend FR SA SU MO A on i i Bo o g a Overnight switching Time switch HW03 switches on overnight at 22 00 Monday and switches off at 6 00 on Tuesday HW03 D gt DY1 MO gt DY2 gt ON 22 00 gt OFF 06 00 Figure 4 47 Signal diagram for night switching MO TU D on Se m IMPORTANT If the Off time is before th
154. ations with values The following possibilities are provided by the Boolean sequence function block e Masking out of particular bits from values e Bit pattern recognition e Bit pattern modification A Boolean sequence function block is not wired in the circuit diagram Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 65 Parameter display and parameter set for Boolean sequence function block BV27 Boolean sequence function block number 27 AND AND operation mode Appears in the parameter display gt I First value gt I2 Second value QV gt Result of the sequence Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block Operating Modes of the Boolean Sequence Function Block Parameter Function AND AND operation OR OR operation XOR Exclusive OR operation NOT Negation of the Boolean value of gt n Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 66 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Value Range 32 bit signed value Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 and gt 12 can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 A02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW
155. be changed at this point Press OK twice to move the cursor across the 01 to the second contact field You could also move the cursor to the next contact field using the left atrow button Press OK Again Pico GFX 70 inserts a contact I 01 at the cursor position Change the contact number to 1 02 so that break contact S2 can be connected to input terminal 12 Press OK so that the cursor jumps to the next position and use the up down arrow keys to change the number to 02 TIP You can press DEL to delete a contact at the cursor position Press OK to move the cursor to the third contact field You do not need a third relay contact so you can now wire the contacts directly up to the coil field Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 8 Commissioning Wiring Pico GFX 70 displays a small arrow 1 in the circuit diagram when creating the wiring 1 TT LLL L 1 C 1 B 7944 2 I 02 1 3 4 5 Sssssss LQ L 1 C 1 B 7944 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Press ALT to activate the wiring arrow cursor and use the arrow buttons to move it ALT also has two other functions depending on the cursor position TIP e In the left contact field you can press ALT to insert a new empty circuit connection e The contact under the cursor can be changed between a make and break contact by pressing the ALT button The wiring arrow works between contacts and r
156. be mounted either vertically or horizontally TIP When using the Pico GFX 70 with expansion units connect the expansion unit before mounting See Connecting the Expansion Unit on page 2 16 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 2 Installation For ease of wiring leave a gap of at least 3 cm between the Pico GFX 70 terminals and the wall or adjacent devices Figure 2 1 Clearances to the Pico GFX 70 VA 30 J L Fitting the Protective Membrane For special applications such as in the food industry the keypad must be protected against the ingress of dust liquids etc For this use the specially designed protective membrane Fit the protective membrane before mounting the display keypad Figure 2 2 Fitting the protective membrane 1 Protective membrane 2 Display keypad module Place the protective membrane over the display keypad Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Installation 2 3 Ensure that the membrane fits snugly in the groove of the display keypad A Otherwise a proper seal cannot be guaranteed and particles may enter underneath the membrane This may cause malfunctions in the keypad In food industry applications there is the risk of bacteria building up underneath the membrane Figure 2 3 Correct position of the protective membrane THAT hae Lf the protective membrane needs to be replaced the
157. blication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 4 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning 18 M 1406 lt n e OD 205 119 w 148 177 206 120 x 149 178 207 121 y 150 179 208 122 z 151 180 209 123 152 y 181 A 210 124 153 0 182 A 211 E 125 154 U 183 A 212 E 126 E 155 184 213 i 1277 156 185 214 128 157 186 215 129 158 x 187 216 130 159 f 188 217 131 160 189 218 132 161 190 219 133 og 162 191 220 134 163 192 221 135 164 1933 222 1336 165 194 223 fj 137 166 195 224 138 167 196 225 B 139 i 168 i 197 226 6 140 169 198 a 227 228 6 235 U 242 249 229 236 243 250 230 y 27 244 9 251 1 231 233 7 2455 5 252 3 232 b 239 v 246 253 2 233 240 247 P 254 234 U 241 248 2 255 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 5 Screen Overview The first time the visualization function is called the screen overview appears with the following tabs e Screens e Passwords e Languages e Screen activation Screens Tab The Screens tab is used for entering the screen name the start screen and password protection if required for the screens concerned Passwords Tab The Pas
158. break capacity cos k 1 Make break at B300 3600 VA 360 VA DC Control Circuit Rating Codes utilization category R300 Light Pilot Duty Max rated operational voltage 300V dc Max thermal uninterrupted current at R300 1A Maximum make break capacity at R300 28 VA 28 VA Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Specifications A 13 Table A 13 GFX I O Modules Transistor Output Specifications Specification Number of transistor outputs 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB4I0F 4 Contacts Semiconductors Rated voltage U 24V de Voltage Range 20 4V dc to 28 8V de Residual Ripple lt 5 Supply current On 0 state 18 mA typical 32 mA max On 1 state 24 mA typical 44 mA max Reverse polarity protection Yes ATTENTION If voltage is applied to the outputs when the polarity of the power supply is reversed this will result ina short circuit Potential isolation to the inputs supply voltage PC interface memory Yes module Pico Link network expansion 0 Rated current at state 1 maximum 0 5A Lamp load OW 01 to 04 without Ry Residual current at state 0 per channel lt 0 1 mA Max output voltage On 0 state with external load 10 MQ 2 5V On 1 state l 0 5 A U U 1V Short circuit protection Thermal Q1 to 04 Yes evaluation with diagnostics inputs 116 115 Short circuit tripping current for Ra lt 10 MQ depending on number of active ch
159. ch 2005 4 88 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts e CIO1OF to CI02OF Actual value 2 Upper setpoint e CIO1FB to CIO2FB Actual value lt Lower setpoint e CI01ZE to CI02ZE Actual value Zero e CIO1CY to CIO2CY Value range exceeded Coils e CIO1EN to CIO2ZEN Counter enable e CIOLRE to CIO2RE Reset actual value to zero e CIO1SE to CIO2SE Accept preset actual value with rising edge Memory Requirement of the Counter Relay The high speed counter function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention High speed counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu If a counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off If Pico GFX 70 is started in RUN mode the counter relay operates with the retentively saved actual value Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 89 Function of the High Speed Incremental Encoder Counter Function Block Figure 4 36 Signal diagram of high speed incremental encoder counter a A ja i mjamaa D mja E mja i gt 1 counter input channel A 2 counter input channel B 3 upper setpoint value g
160. ch can be used in any order in the contact fields of the circuit diagram Table 4 2 Contacts Contact Make Break Number Page contact contact Inputs Inputs of a network station I I 01 12 6 4 Station address 1 to 8 COM slave inputs 1I 1T 01 12 Pico GFX 70 input terminal I 01 12 Cursor button P P 01 04 Network station expansion input R R 01 12 6 4 terminal Station address 1 to 8 Input terminal for expansion module 1R 1R 01 12 COM slave Input terminal for expansion module R R 01 12 Bit inputs via the network RN RN 01 32 6 4 Station address 1 to 8 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 5 Table 4 2 Contacts Contact Make Break Number Page contact contact Diagnostics inputs Expansion network station status I I 14 8 8 Station address 1 to 8 Network station I I 15 16 8 7 short circuit overload Station address 1 to 8 COM slave expansion unit status 1I 1I 14 COM slave short circuit overload 1I 1I 15 16 Expansion status I I 14 8 8 Short circuit overload I I 15 16 8 7 Short circuit overload in expansion R R 15 16 8 7 network station Station address 1 to 8 Short circuit overload in COM slave 1R 1R 15 16 expansion Short circuit overload with expansion R R 15 16 8 7 Outputs Deactivate backlight of the GFX LE LE 01 display Red LED of GFX display LE LE 02 Green LED of GFX display LE LE 03 Pi
161. ck into your circuit as a coil Figure 4 76 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with VC value limitation M 48 VC27EN Table 4 77 Parameter display and parameter set for the VC function block VC27 VC value limitation function block number 27 Appears in the parameter display gt l1 Input value gt SH Upper limit value gt SL Lower limit value OV gt Output value limited Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 153 Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt sH and gt su can be assigned the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Value Range for Inputs and Outputs Value range gt l1 Input value 2 147 483648 to 2147 483647 gt SH Upper limit value gt SL Lower limit value QV gt Output value Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil VCO1LEN to VC32EN function block enable Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 154 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Memory Requirement of the Value Limitation Function Block The va
162. co GFX 70 output Pico GFX 70 Q Q 01 08 6 4 network station Station address 1 to 8 COM slave output 1Q 1Q 01 08 Pico GFX 70 output Q Q 01 08 Pico GFX 70 output expansion with S 5 01 08 6 4 network station Station address 1 to 8 Output of COM slave expansion 1s 15 01 08 Pico GFX 70 output expansion s s 01 08 Bit outputs via the network SN SN 01 32 6 4 Station address 1 to 8 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 6 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table 4 2 Contacts Contact Make Break Number Page contact contact Other contacts Markers M M 01 96 4 12 COM slave marker 1M 1M 01 96 6 18 REMOTE MARKER Jump label 01 32 4 119 Diagnostics messages ID ID 01 16 6 13 COM slave diagnostics messages 1ID 1ID 01 16 6 17 Function blocks Analog value comparator function A X Q1 A X Q1 X 01 32 4 40 block Arithmetic value overflow CARRY AR X CYJA RX X 01 32 4 43 function block cy Zero arithmetic value zero function AR X ZE A R X X 01 32 4 43 block ZE Data block comparator function block BC X E1 BC X E1 X 01 32 4 47 error number of elements exceeded Data block comparator function block BC X E2 BC X E2 X 01 32 4 47 error range overlap Data block comparator function block BC X E3 BC X E3 X 01 32 4 47 error invalid offset Data block
163. component EN enable Enable module EP enable proportional component Activate proportional component RE reset Reset actual value to zero SE set enable Set to a predefined value ST stop STOP block processing Tiz trigger Trigger coil Table A 20 Function Block Contacts Contact Meaning of abbreviation Description CY carry Status 1 if the value range is exceeded carry E1 error 1 Error 1 dependent on function block E2 error 2 Error 2 dependent on function block E3 error 3 Error 3 dependent on function block EQ equal Comparison result status 1 if values equal FB fall below Status 1 if the actual value is less than or equal to the lower set point value GT greater than Status 1 if the value at 11 gt 12 LI limit indicator Value range manipulated variable exceeded LT less than Status 1 if the value at 11 lt 12 OF overflow Status 1 if the actual value is greater than or equal to the upper set point value Q1 output Q1 Switch output QV output value Current actual value of the function block e g counter value ZE zero Status 1 if the value of the element input OV is equal to zero Specifications A 19 Table A 21 Function Block Inputs Constants and Operands Input Meaning of abbreviation Description F1 Factor 1 Gain factor for 11 11 F1 x Value F2 Factor 2 Gain factor for 12 I2 F2 x Value HY Hystere
164. creen activation tab gt Activate Yes The program consists of five screens containing bit display elements Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Bit display_automatic screen change e60 Date and Time This screen element shows the date and time of the Pico GFX 70 real time clock on the display You can also select for this international display formats according to the ten easy system languages plus the USA display format Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Date and time screen element onto the screen 2 Place the mouse over the screen element hold down the left mouse button and position it as required The height of the element frame depends on the font size used Three sizes are possible e Normal font e Double font Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the screen element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The maximum width of the element is limited and depends on the font size This also determines the display a format Date formats tab Select the language and one of the four formats available in the Date formats tab These are independent of the language set on the device WED 01 10 03 Invisible via I1 01 10 2003
165. ction INI Initialize marker ranges CPY Copy marker ranges Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt 12 and gt no can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Specifying the marker range without offset If MB MW or MD markers are specified both at gt 11 and at gt 12 the number of markers defines the source or destination range Specifying a marker range with offset If you wish to work with an offset specify one of the following variables at function block input gt 11 or gt 12 e Constant e Actual value QV of a function block e Analog input IA e Analog output QA The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MBO1 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 56 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Contacts BTO01E1 to BT32E1 the number of marker bytes exceeds the source or destination range BTO1E2 to BT32E2 source and destination range overlap Only valid for CPY mode copy marker ranges BT01E3 to BT32E3 the specified offset is invalid Coils BTO1T_ to BT32T_ trigger coil of the transfer data block function block Memory Requirement of the Tr
166. ction block Timing relay Switch function On delayed with random switching Time range M S Minute Seconds Set time gt I1 20 min 30 s Actual time QV gt Copied to MD96 T 01 X M S gt I1 Hi 30 gt I2 QV gt MD96 T 01 X M S gt I1 H gt I2 QV gt MD96 L 001 B 7808 ARO1 ADD CP10 T 18 7x L 002 B 7808 ARO1 ADD T 18 X L 001 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 31 Assigning Operands to an Input of a Function Block IMPORTANT Only the following variables can be assigned to the input of a function block e Constants e g 42 e Markers such as MD MW MB e Analog output QA e Analog inputs LA e All output variables of the function blocks QV gt Assigning operands to a QV Output of a Function Block Only markers such as MD MW MB or the analog output QA can be assigned to a variable output of a function block IMPORTANT Deleting Operands on the Function Block Inputs and Outputs Position the cursor on the required operand 1 Press the DEL button The operand is deleted Deleting an Entire Function Block Ensure that all contacts and coils of the function block are deleted 1 Select the required function block from the list In this case CP10 2 Press the DEL button The function block is deleted Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 32 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 T 01 X M S gt I1 20 3
167. ctivate counter enable High speed counter function block CH X SE X 01 04 v v set counter value Preset High speed counter function block CH X RE X 01 04 v v reset counter value Incremental encoder counter function CI X SE X 01 02 v v block set counter value Preset Incremental encoder counter function CI X EN X 01 02 v v block activate counter enable Incremental encoder counter function CI X RE X 01 02 v v block reset counter value Comparator function block CP X 01 32 v Activate text output function block D X EN X 01 32 V enable Data function block trigger coil DB X T_ X 01 32 V v PID controller activate DC X EN X 01 32 V v PID controller activate P component DC X EP X 01 32 V v PID controller activate component DC X ET X 01 32 V v PID controller activate D component DC X ED X 01 32 V v PID controller accept manual DC X SE X 01 32 V v manipulated variable Activate signal smoothing filter FT X EN X 01 32 V v Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 11 Table 4 3 Usable Relays and Function Blocks Coils GFX 70 display Get from network station function GT X 01 32 y block Seven day time switch HW X 01 32 v Year time switch function block HY X 01 32 y Activate value scaling function block LS X EN X 01 32 V y Master reset function block MR X T_ X 01 32 V J Activate numerical converter NC X
168. ctured by selecting the controller number Example Project with 3 devices Program 1 Controller DC 10 11 Program 2 Controller DC20 21 and 22 Program 3 Controller DC30 Wiring a PID Controller You integrate a PID controller in your circuit as a contact and coil Figure 4 41 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with PID controller M 51 Dco2EN Dco2EP Dco2Er l E DC02ED Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Parameter Display and Parameter Set for PID Controller DC02 UNP gt I1 gt I2 DC02 PID controller function block number 02 gt KP Si UNP Unipolar mode gt TV Appears in the parameter display gt TC gt I1 Setpoint of PID controller gt MV gt I2 Actual value of PID controller QV gt gt KP Proportional gain Kp gt TN Reset time Th gt TV Rate time Ty Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 97 gt TC Scan time gt MV Manual manipulated variable Qv gt Manipulated variable In the parameter display of a PID controller you set the operating mode the setpoints and enable the parameter display Operating Modes of the PID Controller Parameter Manipulated variable is output as UNP Unipolar 12 bit value 0 to 4095 BIP Bipolar 13 bit value signed 12 bit value 4096 to 4095 Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt 12 gt KP gt TN gt TV gt TC and gt mv can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e
169. cuit diagram determines the status of the relay Exception When working with jumps the same coil can be used twice Coil with Contactor Function The output signal follows immediately after the input signal and the relay acts as a contactor Figure 4 18 Signal diagram of contactor function Impulse Relay a The relay coil switches whenever the input signal changes from 0 to 1 The relay behaves like a bistable flip flop Figure 4 19 Signal diagram of impulse relay Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 35 A coil is automatically switched off if the power fails and if STOP mode is active Exception Retentive coils retain signal 1 see Rezention on page 7 22 Set S and Reset R Coil Function The Set S and Reset R coil functions are normally used in pairs The relay picks up when the coil is set A and remains in this state until it is reset B by the coil function The supply voltage is switched off C the coil does not have a retentive effect Figure 4 20 Signal diagram of Set and Reset If both coils are triggered at the same time priority is given to the coil in the circuit diagram with the higher circuit connection number This is shown in the above signal diagram in section B Figure 4 21 Simultaneous triggering of Q 01 In the example above the reset coil has priority with simultaneous triggering of the set and r
170. d in time critical applications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 10 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Bit Display Example Program 1 Associated Variable and Visibility The program consists of five screens that can be selected with the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button Editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 The screens show examples of the use of both associated variable and visibility elements The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LED 3 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Bit display_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the activation of the bit display exclusively via the associated variable The first screen contains four bit display elements These are activated in succession via Boolean operands Q1 to Q4 A make contact bit logic is selected for setting the bit display elements to the state of the corresponding outputs on off Figure 5 3 Bit display and static text Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 02 Q3 QO4 Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of the bit display with overlaid static text exclusively via the associated variable Screen
171. d needs to be returned United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number see phone number above to obtain one to your distributor in order to complete the return process Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for States return procedure Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Supersedes Publication 1760 UM002A EN P April 2004 Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
172. d the RUN or STOP operating mode See Figure 1 1 on page 1 4 Table 1 2 Power Supply and RUN STOP Operating Mode Indicators LED Power supply RUN STOP Status Indicates LED OFF No power supply mode LED LED continuously lit Power supply present STOP mode LED flashing Power supply present RUN mode Pico Link LED LED OFF Pico Link not operational fault in configuration LED continuously lit Pico Link is initialized and no station has been detected The front of the 1760 DU LED flashing Pico Link operating fault free and 1760 DUB device has a green LED and a red LED These can be used in your visualization application as light indicators The following applies to Terminal mode Table 1 3 Terminal Mode Indicators LED Color Status Indicates Power Green LED OFF No power supply supply RUN STOP mode LED LED continuously lit Power supply present STOP mode LED flashing Power supply present RUN mode Fault on the Pico Link Red LED OFF Operation correct LED continuously lit Pico Link remote device faulty Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 12 Overview Menu Structure Main Menu without Password Protection TIP Access the main menu by pressing OK STOP Circuit diagram display Main menu RUN Power flow display PROGRAM PROGRAM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM g F STOP RUN DELETE PROG
173. display keypad must be removed Replace the membrane and refit the device Mounting the Protective Cover The protective cover is provided for using the device in aggressive environments This protects the display and the keypad against mechanical damage or destruction Protection to IP65 is maintained The protective cover can be opened so that the keypad can be used The protective cover can be closed with a sealing facility to provide protection against unauthorized operation Before mounting the display keypad fit the protective cover Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 4 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 2 4 Removing the front frame Remove the front frame as shown in the figure The protective cover can be mounted in two different positions Choose the position that is most suitable for the application at hand and your requirements Figure 2 5 Position of the protective cover Installation 2 5 Figure 2 6 Installing the protective cover Install the protective cover as shown in the figure Sealing the Protective Cover Figure 2 7 Sealing the protective cover The grip handle of the protective cover is provided with holes that can be used in any mounting position You can fit a wire or similar material through these holes in order to seal the cover If the wire is provided with a lead seal the covet is seal
174. e the timing relay switches the warning light on and off every 2 seconds Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 158 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 T O0OL S gt I1 001 000 gt I2 QV gt 0 550 EN Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Doubling the flashing frequency 1 Select the power flow display T 01 and change the constant of the setpoint time to 001 000 When you press OK the warning light will flash at twice the frequency On the display ew indicates that the enable coil is actuated Setpoint value settings with constants can be modified via the PARAMETERS menu Tae The actual value is only displayed in RUN mode Call up the parameter display for this via the power flow display or PARAMETERS menu Screens Chapter 5 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 In the following description the term visualization is used for the display and operator function While you can enter the circuit diagram via PicoSoft as well as directly on the device all the visualization functions can only be programmed using PicoSoft Pro The visualization functions can then be loaded from there to the Pico GFX 70 or onto a memory module download function This chapter uses the examples supplied from version 6 1 to describe the basic methods of designing visualization systems using PicoSoft Pro The PicoSoft Help system provides a more detailed description of the software PicoSoft Pro manages the visu
175. e which defines which hardware can use the bus next e Multicast broadcast messaging with receiver side message filtering e High level of real time capability short reaction time for high priority messages short fault message get times e Functionality in environments with severe interference short block lengths e High level of error security Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 2 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Pico Link Topologies Addressing and Functions Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IMPORTANT CAN has been used as the basis for the design of the Pico Link The messages have been adapted and optimized to suit the requirements of the Pico GFX 70 environment The Pico Link allows the configuration of a line topology There are two wiring methods which can be used for the required addressing options e Loop through the unit wiring arrangement e Wiring arrangement using a T connector and a spur line Loop Through the Unit Wiring Method With this wiring method it is possible to implement the addressing of the stations via station 1 or the PicoSoft Pro If the line is interrupted the network is no longer operational from this point in the network T Connector and Spur Line Each device must be addressed individually with this wiring method by e Downloading the program e Downloading the address with PicoSoft Pro e Using the display or e The device is a
176. e 7944 with the first three circuit connections already generated The Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram supports 4 contacts and one coil in series The Pico GFX 70 display can display 6 circuit diagram contact fields Use the up down left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor over the invisible circuit diagram grid The first four columns are contact fields the fifth column is a coil field Each line is a circuit connection Pico GFX 70 automatically connects the contact to the power supply Figure 3 3 Circuit diagram with inputs 11 12 and output 01 I 01 I 02 Q 01 L 1 C 1 B 7944 Now try to wire up the following Pico GFX 70 diagram Switches S1 and S2 are at the input 1 01 and 1 02 are the contacts for the input terminals Relay K1 is represented by the relay coil t Q 01 The symbol r identifies the coil s function in this case a relay coil acting as a contactor Q 01 is one of the Pico GFX 70 output relays L 1 C 1 B 7944 L 1 C 1 B 7944 L 1 C 2 B 7944 I 02 L 1 C 3 B 7944 Commissioning 3 7 From the First Contact to the Output Coil With Pico GFX 70 you work from the input to the output The first input contact is I 01 1 Press OK Pico GFX 70 proposes the first contact r 01 at the cursor position 1 flashes and can be changed for example to a P for a push button input using the up down arrows keys However nothing needs to
177. e On time Pico GFX 70 will switch off on the following day Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 110 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Time overlaps The time settings of a time switch overlap The clock switches on at 16 00 on Monday whereas on Tuesday and Wednesday it switches on at 10 00 On Monday to Wednesday the switching off time is 22 00 HW04 A HW04 B gt DY1 MO gt DY1 TU gt DY2 WE gt DY2 WE gt ON 16 00 gt ON 10 00 gt OFF 22 00 gt OFF 00 00 Figure 4 48 Signal diagram of overlaps MO TWU WE TH on 16 00 22 00 op 10 00 24 00 on Sen 10 00 22 00 Switch on and switch off times are always based on the channel which switches first IMPORTANT Response in the event of a power failure The power is removed between 15 00 and 17 00 The relay drops out and remains off even after the power returns since the first switching off time was Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 at 16 00 HWO5 A HWO5 B gt DY1 MO gt DY1 MO gt DY2 SU gt DY2 SU gt OFF 16 00 gt ON 12 00 gt OFF 18 00 IMPORTANT When switched on Pico GFX 70 always updates the switching state on the basis of all the available switching time settings Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 111 24 hour switching The time switch is to switch for 24 hours Switch on time at 0 00 on Monday and switch off time at 0 00 on Tuesday HW20 A HW2
178. e circuit diagram and data You can then make another four attempts to enter the password Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 8 Pico GFX 70 Settings Changing the Menu Language ENGLISH A DEUTSCH v FRANCAIS ESPANOL y ITALIANO PORTUGUES NEDERLAND SVENSKA POLSKI TURKCE Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Pico GFX 70 provides ten menu languages which are set as required via the System menu Language Display English ENGLISH German DEUTSCH French FRANCAIS Spanish ESPANOL Italian ITALIANO Portuguese PORTUGUES Dutch NEDERLANDS Swedish SVENSKA Polish POLSKI Turkish TURKCE IMPORTANT Language selection is only possible if Pico GFX 70 is not password protected 1 Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 2 Select MENU LANGUAGE to change the menu language The language selection for the first entry ENGLISH is displayed 3 Use the up down arrow keys to select the new menu language e g Italian ITALIANO 4 Confirm with OK ITALIANO is assigned a tick 5 Exit the menu with ESC SICUREZZA SISTEMA LINGUA MENU CONFIGURATORE Changing Parameters T 03 y S cCP08 c 17 L 1 RUN Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 9 Pico GFX 70 will now show the new menu language Press ESC to return to the Status display Pico GFX 70 allows you to change function relay parameters such as timing relay set poin
179. e cleared if the power supply is switched off or if Pico GFX 70 is switched to STOP mode Exception Retentive data keeps its state see Retention on page 7 22 The most recent actual values are transferred to the operands every cycle The data function block is an exception ATTENTION IMPORTANT The following applies to RUN mode Pico GFX 70 processes the function block after a pass through the circuit diagram The last state of the coils is used for this If you want to prevent other people from modifying the parameters change the access enable symbol from to when creating the circuit diagram and setting parameters and protect the circuit diagram with a password Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 40 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 ATTENTION The function blocks are designed so that a function block output can be assigned directly to the input of another function block This enables you always to have an ovetview of which value is transferred If different data formats ate used such as if the first function block uses 32 bits and an 8 bit or 16 bit format is used for further processing sign value errors or value errors may occur when transferring from one function block to another one Analog Value Comparator Threshold Value Switch Pico GFX 70 provides 32 analog value comparators from A 01 to A 32 With an analog value comparator or threshold v
180. e communication with a Pico Link station this station must not be accessed at the same time in Terminal mode via the Pico Link Proceed as follows Your Pico Link or point to point serial interface must be running correctly 1 Press the OK button from the Status Display The first menu will appear 2 Press the Up Arrow button This will display the TERMINAL MODE menu item 3 Press the OK button The START MODE menu item will flash 4 Press the Up Arrow button Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 30 Commissioning STATION ID 0 START MODE STATION ID 0 START MODE STATION ID 0 START MODE STATION ID 2 START MODE Connection establishment in progress Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 Select the second station This station will control the display and respond to the keypad IMPORTANT Station ID 0 Station at the point to point serial interface 1 Pico Link Station 1 2 Pico Link Station 2 3 Pico Link Station 3 4 Pico Link Station 4 5 Pico Link Station 5 6 Pico Link Station 6 7 Pico Link Station 7 8 Pico Link Station 8 6 Press the OK button Select your station 1 Press the Up or Down Arrow button 2 Press the OK button Select the START MODE menu option 1 Press the Down Arrow button 2 Press the OK button In this case Pico Link station 2 is connected The GFX tries to
181. e function block is enabled in the circuit diagram Figure 4 27 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with enabling of data block comparator function block n a BC27EN BC27E1 BC27E2 BC27E3 M 48 BC27EQ BC27EN M 49 Parameter display and parameter set for a data block comparator BC27 Data block comparator function block number 27 Appears in the parameter display gt I1 Start of comparison range 1 gt I2 Start of comparison range 2 gt NO Number of elements to be compared in bytes per range Value range 1 to 383 Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block According to the operands at the inputs gt 11 and gt 12 the following operating modes are possible Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt 12 and gt no can have the following operands Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 48 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Specifying the marker range without offset If MB MW or MD markers are specified at both gt 11 and gt 12 the number of the markers is the start of comparison range 1 or 2 Specifying the marker range with offset If you wish to
182. e heen ee aes A 17 Memory Requirement 23s tavette se eiswlad utter on pidiey A 20 Index Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Common Techniques Used in this Manual Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual e the purpose of this manual e conventions used in this manual e related documentation Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting automation control systems that use Allen Bradley Pico controllers Pico GFX 70 must only be installed and wired by trained electricians or other persons familiar with the installation of electrical equipment You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic You should understand electronic process control and be able to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to generate the electronic signals that control your application If you do not contact your local Allen Bradley representative for the proper training before using this product This manual is a learning and reference guide for Pico GFX 70 controller It contains the information you need to install wire and configure the module It also provides diagnostic and troubleshooting information and programming examples The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists such as this one prov
183. e od ree 1 8 BUCHOS e nite oE hen eee rote ea Re oe 1 8 Moving Through Menus and Choosing Values 1 8 Selecting Main and System Menu 6 cee cece seen 1 9 Pico GFX 70 LED Displays tress saieii ia Mew Rare nein lege eas 1 11 Men STEUC IIRC 584 ioa EAE RREO E Sack he ats 1 12 Selecting or Togeling Between Menu Items 1 18 Cursor Displays cayugo ty wae pole a E ibe 1 18 Sette Vales on in E cena whale hy Bice ELE EA 1 19 Chapter 2 Mountino seit teas st an Faa ARENAS RANG A HA RE OREN E HEAR ES 2 1 Connecting the Expansion Unit n 6 nig se vee de steaks 2 16 TE TANG ie Ash BA Le Sete teh ha ha et ce ear tie Rg se rg hi 2 16 Tool for Cage Clamp Terminals iat bso tneineeine os 2 16 Connection Cross Sections of the Cage Clamp Terminal Cables fa oot genome phere ep atea as 2 16 Tool for Slot Head Screws for Expansion I O Unit 2 16 Connection Cross Sections of Screw Terminal Cables 2 16 Connecting the Power Supply ccs isile ois ea astern ky 2 17 Cable Protectores senes iiaea ae R le See hs Re E 2 19 Commectino tie iptits i eiiis wo wit tag eee E E Acie 2 20 C nn ctne ING THUS in goctaicG ae deack deen siara dni sareors aceon aus 2 20 Connectino DG Inputs i ad Ete cee E A BRA is teal 2 23 Connecting the Outputs joie coca ka OS OR Se eis 2 28 Connecting Relay Ourputsss 6 ity aurne bans beware Sante ea no eee es 2 28 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 0 2 28 T760 TATZ NOW Glas sitet a ke
184. e of the integral component of the manipulated variable with scan time t Yp t Value of the differential component of the manipulated variable with scan time t Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 100 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The proportional component in the PID controller The proportional component Yp is the product of the gain IK and the control difference e The control difference is the difference between the setpoint X and the actual value X at a specified scan time The equation used by the device for the proportional component is as follows Yp K K0 XO Kp proportional gain X t Setpoint with scan time t X t Actual value with scan time t The integral component in the PID controller The integral component Yj is proportional to the sum of the control difference over time The equation used by the device for the integral component is as follows Yy K x T Ty x XO X0 Y 1 K proportional gain T Scan time T Integration time also known as reset time X t Setpoint with scan time t X t Actual value with scan time t Y t 1 Value of the integral component of the manipulated variable with scan time t 1 The differential component in the PID controller The differential component Yp is proportional to the change in the control difference So as to avoid step changes or jumps in the manipulated variable caused by
185. e signal lines Incorrect switching states may occur if they are not connected correctly Connecting Servo Valves Figure 2 38 Connecting servo valves LO1 LO2 L01 JUUL Aj B EE TE Ja Ai y m o 0000 goood ooo Ooo OO oO oaaao oO ololLcnollLlG 24V OV OV 1 2 B 14 15 l6 I7 18 19110 111112 OV OV QA1 Installation 2 33 Connecting the Pico Link Setpoint Entry for a Drive Figure 2 39 Setpoint entry for a drive LO1 LO2 5 L01 gt 1A A 12 OV OV QA1 ooo Oo fF oOo oO oo oo A 24V OV OV 1 12 13 14 15 l6 I7 18 19110 Pico GFX 70 with network connection 1760 LDFC can be used for creating the Pico Link network Up to eight devices can be connected to this network Further information can be found in Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections on page 6 1 Accessories Connection Plug 8 pole RJ45 1760 CONN RJ45 Connection Assignment of the RJ45 Socket on the Device Figure 2 40 RJ45 socket onon UN Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 34 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B
186. eater than Equal to Less than gt I2 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 91 Figure 4 37 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with comparator CP32LT sQ01 CP32EQ s Q 02 CP32GT IR Q 01 R Q 02 Parameter display and parameter set for the comparator function block CP02_ Function block analog value comparator number 02 Appears in the parameter display gt I1 Comparison value 1 gt I2 Comparison value 2 Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 and gt 12 can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 JAO3 terminal 111 JA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Contacts e CPO01LT to CP32LT less than Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value on gt 11 is less than the value on gt I2 gt 11 lt gt I2 e CPO1LEQ to CP32EQ equal to Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value on gt 11 is equal to the value on gt I2 gt I1 72 e CP01GT to CP32GT greater than Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 92 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Contact make contact switches to status 1 if the value at gt 11 is greater than the value at gt 12 gt 11 gt 12 Memory Requir
187. ect the following inputs and areas e Start or modification of the program e Transfer of a circuit diagram to or from a memory module display keypad variants e Change of the RUN or STOP mode e Calling and modification of function block parameters e All settings of the real time clock e Modifications of all system parameters e Communication with the individual device looping to other devices possible e Switching off the password delete function Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 2 Pico GFX 70 Settings ENTER PASSWORD Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 MEIA A password that has been entered in Pico GFX 70 is transferred to the memory module together with the circuit diagram irrespective of whether it was activated or not If this Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram is loaded back from the memory module the password will also be transferred to Pico GFX 70 and is activated immediately Password Setup A password can be set via the System menu regardless of the RUN or STOP modes You cannot change to the System menu if a password is already activated 1 Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 2 Select the menu option SECURITY to enter the password 3 Press the OK button and change over to the PASSWORD menu 4 If you press the OK button again you will access the password input If no password has been entered Pico GFX 70 changes directly to the password display and
188. ective position e Range D The counting direction coil CH D is actuated If counting pulses are present downward count is initiated If the lower setpoint value is undershot the contact CH FB becomes active e Range E The reset coil CH RE is activated The actual value is set to zero The contact CH ZE is active e Range F The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the direction of the values positive or negative Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 85 High Speed Incremental Encoder Counters Pico GFX 70 provides two high speed incremental encoder counters C101 and C102 The high speed counter inputs are hardwired to the digital inputs 11 12 I3 and 14 These counter relays allow you to count events independently of the cycle time You can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value You can use a CI counter if you wish to define a start value The CI counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter Frequency and Pulse Shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 The signals on channels A and B must lead or lag by 90 Otherwise the counting direction cannot be determined IMPORTANT Double the number of pulses are counted as a result of the internal method of operation of the incremen
189. ed The cover can then only be opened by breaking the seal or the wite Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 6 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Mounting the Display Keypad Front Mounting Figure 2 8 Drill holes for the GFX TROT Drill and punch out two 22 5 mm diameter holes The diameter is the same as is normally required for control circuit devices IMPORTANT Observe the following technical requirements e The hole spacing is 30 mm e The maximum thickness of the front plate for mounting the processor unit must not be more than 6 mm e The maximum thickness of the front plate for mounting an expansion unit with a DIN rail in addition to the processor unit must not be more than 4 mm e Leave enough space at the side for the processor unit and if necessary the expansion unit e In order to ensure protection to IP65 the surface of the mounting front must be even and smooth Installation 2 7 Figure 2 9 Mounting the display keypad The protective membrane or the protective cover must be fitted Fit the display keypad in the punched fixing holes Figure 2 10 Screw fastening the display keypad Screw fasten the display keypad uuuuuUo N x Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 8 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IMPORTANT The tightening torque must be between 1 2 and 2 Nm
190. elays When you move the arrow onto a contact or relay coil it changes back to the cursor and can be reactivated with ALT if required Pico GFX 70 automatically wires adjacent contacts in a circuit connection up to the coil TIP Press ALT to wire the cursor from z 02 through to the coil field The cursor changes into a flashing wiring arrow and automatically jumps to the next possible wiring position Press the left arrow button Contact x 02 will be connected up to the coil field You can use DEL to erase a connection at the cursor or arrow position Where connections intersect the vertical connections are deleted first then if you press DEL again the horizontal connections are deleted TIP Press the left arrow button again The cursor will move to the coil field Press OK Pico GFX 70 inserts the relay coil 01 The specified coil function 1 and the output relay Q 01 are correct and do not have to be changed Your first working Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram now looks like this Commissioning 3 9 Figure 3 4 Your first circuit diagram SeOd a Q 01 L 1 C 1 B 7944 visible area 6 Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram display The SAVE menu appears Figure 3 5 SAVE menu Sede L Q 01 visible area 7 Press the OK button The circuit diagram is stored Once you have connected push button actuators S1 and S2 you can test your circuit diagram
191. ement of the Counter Relay The comparator function block requires 32 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Text Output Function Block The GFX device provides 32 function blocks that operate in a Pico Standard as text output function blocks These function blocks work in the GFX device as contacts and coils in the same way as in a Pico Standard In the GFX device texts actual value output and setpoint entry are implemented using the appropriate visualization elements IMPORTANT The text function block was adopted from the Pico Standard so that the circuit diagram is compatible This simplifies the processing of Pico Standard programs Pico Standard programs with text function blocks can be loaded directly onto the Pico GFX 70 either from the memory module or from PicoSoft Pro The contacts and coils are processed in the same way as in a Pico Standard However texts are not output The function block requires the entire memory even if no texts have been transferred IMPORTANT Do not use the text function block on the GFX device This will use up memory unnecessarily with unused functions Figure 4 38 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with a text output function block DB16 gt I1 Qv gt Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 93 Contacts A contact has been assigned to the text output function block D01Q1 to D32Q1 text function block is active Coils DO1EN to D32EN enable
192. er to visually indicate changes of this kind you can link message texts with a variable associated variable When the variable concerned assumes a specified value the Pico GFX 70 outputs the appropriate message text The default text is output if the variable assumes a value that is not assigned to a text Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Message text screen element into the screen 2 Position the mouse over the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Two sizes are available e Normal font size e Double font size You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as required by dragging the selection handle on the sides TIP Ensure that the screen elements are sufficiently large for containing the corresponding text of all languages selected This can be checked easily in the screen overview Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 31 Associated variable tab On the Associated variable tab you define the variable with the value for activating the output text Message texts tab Assign in the M
193. erial interface e provide closed loop control with P PI and PID controllers e scale arithmetic values output manipulated variables as pulse width modulated signals e run arithmetic functions add subtract multiply divide e track the flow of current in the circuit diagram load save and password protect circuit diagrams If you prefer to wire up the Pico GFX 70 from a PC then use Pico Soft Pro Pico Soft Pro allows you to create and test your circuit diagram on the PC All display and operator functions on the device are created exclusively using the Pico Soft Pro software Pico Soft Pro is also used to print out your circuit diagram in DIN ANSI or ladder format Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 4 Overview Component Features Figure 1 1 Display and Keypad Features 1 2 3 4 a a 1 DEL button 2 Graphic display 3 ALT button 4 LEDs for signalling 5 Mode button 6 Right down cursor buttons 7 OK button 8 Left up cursor buttons 9 ESC button Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Overview 1 5 Processor Figure 1 2 Processor Features 1 2 ooo 1 Power supply 2 Pico Link terminals 3 Expansion module connector 4 Socket for memory module PC and point to point connection 5 Power supply operating mode LED 6 Pico Link LED Figure 1 3 Re
194. erial interface enables you to access a remote device If you use the Pico Link network all other network stations can be addressed MMe Terminal mode is a separate operating mode like RUN mode It only functions when a program is not running For this mode to be active the GFX must be in STOP mode IMPORTANT All connected devices must also support Terminal mode The following topologies are permissible Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 26 Commissioning Terminal Mode Using the Point to Point Serial Interface Figure 3 12 Terminal mode using the point to point serial interface Ho Terminal mode using the Pico Link topology Figure 3 13 Terminal mode using the Pico Link topology fi pea RZ I GFX 70 S18 mam see I GFX 70 GFX 70 ES l GFX 70 In the above topology the physical location is not identical to the station number The GFX device was connected in the middle of the network line Terminal mode functions irrespective of the device location and station number Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Commissioning 3 27 Figure 3 14 Terminal mode in Pico Link with two GFX devices GFX 70
195. es empty circuit connections without contacts or coils 1 2 3 Delete all the contacts and coils from the circuit connection Position the cursor on the first contact field of the empty circuit connection Press DEL Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 26 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 P2 P1 Kod P3 P4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The subsequent citcuit connection s will be pulled up and any existing links between circuit connections will be retained Switching Via the Cursor Buttons With Pico GFX 70 you can also use the four cursor buttons as hard wired inputs in the circuit diagram The buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts P 01 to P 04 The P buttons can be activated and deactivated in the h System menu The P buttons can also be used for testing circuits or manual operation These button functions are also useful for servicing and commissioning purposes Example 1 A lamp at output Q1 is switched on and off via inputs I1 and I2 or by using the up down arrow buttons Figure 4 11 Switch Q1 via 11 12 or the up down arrow buttons I aa s Q 01 P 02 I R Q 01 P 04 Example 2 Input I1 is used to control output Q1 I5 switches over to cursor operation and via m 01 disconnects the circuit connection I 01 Figure 4 12 15 switches over to the cursor buttons I 05
196. es four high speed up down counters CH01 to CH04 for use The high speed frequency counters are hard wired to the digital inputs I1 to I4 These counter relays allow you to count events independently of the cycle time You can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The contacts will switch according to the actual value To specify a start value for example counting from the value 1989 this can be implemented using a CH counter The CH counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter Frequency and Pulse Shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 Wiring of a Counter The following assignment of the digital inputs apply e I1 counter input for the counter CH01 e 2 counter input for the counter CH02 e 3 counter input for the counter CH03 e 14 counter input for the counter CH04 MATAA T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CK CH CI counters only once You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 80 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 4 33 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with high speed counter Ty e CHO1EN Se aaa a be ia CHO1RE i 07 asstesstass
197. es not have any coils Memory Requirement of the Arithmetic Function Block The arithmetic function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Addition 42 1000 1042 2147483 647 1 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY AR CY Status 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 46 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2048 1000 1048 Subtraction 1134 42 1092 2147483648 3 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY AR CY Status 1 4096 1000 5096 4096 1000 3096 Multiplication 12x12 144 1000042 x 2401 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY Correct value 2401100842 AR CY Status 1 1000 x 10 10000 Division 1024 256 4 1024 35 29 the places after the decimal point are omitted 1024 0 last valid value of this arithmetic operation due to overflow CARRY mathematically correct Infinite AR CY Status 1 1000 10 100 1000 10 100 1000 10 100 10 100 0 BC27 gt I1 gt NO Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 47 Data Block Comparator Pico GFX 70 provides 32 function blocks BC01 to BC32 for comparing values of two consistent marker ranges The comparison is in byte format The following marker types can be compared e MB e MW e MD Th
198. eset coils Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 36 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Coil Negation Inverse Contactor Function 1 The output signal is simply an inversion of the input signal the relay operates like a contactor with contacts that have been negated If the coil is triggered with the 1 state the coil switches its make contacts to the 0 state Figure 4 22 Signal diagram of inverse contactor function Rising Edge Evaluation Cycle Pulse If the coil is only meant to switch on a rising edge this function will be applied With a change in the coil state from 0 to 1 the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state for one cycle Figure 4 23 Signal diagram of cycle pulse with rising edge ca ff 1p on I l Falling Edge Evaluation Cycle Pulse If the coil is only meant to switch on a falling edge this function will be applied With a change in the coil state from 1 to 0 the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state for one cycle Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 37 Figure 4 24 Signal diagram of cycle pulse with falling edge MATA set coil is automatically switched off if the power fails and if the device is in STOP mode Exception Retentive coils retain signal 1 see Refention on page 7 22 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 38 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Function Blocks Publication 1760 UM002
199. ess ALT again to return to Move Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram and parameter display Maite Pico GFX 70 performs many of these cursor movements automatically For example Pico GFX 70 switches the cursor to Move mode if no further entries or connections are possible at the selected cursor position Opening the Parameter Display for Function Blocks with Contacts or Coils If you specify the contact or coil of a function relay type in Entry mode the Pico GFX 70 automatically switches from the contact number to the function block parameter display when you press OK Press the right arrow key to switch to the next contact or coil field without entering any parameters Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 3 Program A program is a sequence of commands which the Pico GFX 70 executes cyclically in RUN mode A Pico GFX 70 program consists of the necessary settings for the device the Pico Link Serial Interface password system settings a circuit diagram and or function blocks and or the visualization screens The circuit diagram is that part of the program where the contacts are connected together In RUN mode a coil is switched on and off in accordance with the current flow and the coil function specified Function Blocks Function blocks are program elements with special functions Example timing relays time switches arithmetic function blocks Function blocks are elements provided with or without contacts and coils as required
200. essage text elements These are activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display Screen 2 The second screen contains one message text element with one message text Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 34 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine FE UNB Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Message Text Example Program 3 Message Text with a Display Change The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display This program is an extension of the program Message text_manual screen change e60 The extension consists of two messages being contained in one message text element in screen 2 which are also toggled automatically A display change is also executed in one message text The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The make contacts C01ZE of the counter in the circuit diagram are switched directly before the outputs Q1 to Q4 as well as before LE 3 The outputs are only meant to be active with screen 1 i e when the counter has the value 0 The screens are activated via counter C01 This has the value 2 as the upper setpoint SH thus providing t
201. essage texts tab the value of the associated variable for its corresponding message text and select the language and the default text Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Display change tab The Display change tab offers the following display forms of the message which can be controlled with an associated variable e flashing e Inverted Message Text Example Program 1 Activating Message Texts with a Boolean Variable The program consists of seven screens that can be selected using the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LED03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The message texts are controlled in all scteens by means of Boolean variables As these only have two states 0 1 only two different messages can be output via each message text element If other variable types are used the number of possible message texts can be increased accordingly Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Visibility_Display change_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the activation of message texts by means of the associated variable The output of two different
202. establish connection to the selected device The text flashes Once the connection is established the menu appears or the Status display in which the selected device is active 11 4 789 INT2 P TU 06 05 2003 Q 1 45678 RUN Commissioning 3 31 IMPORTANT If the text Connection establishment in progress is displayed for longer than 10 s the connection to the selected device is faulty Press ESC to cancel the selection Rectify the fault Try to re establish the connection The following applies if the device to be operated is in RUN mode and is displaying a screen This screen is not displayed in Terminal mode GFX message The remote device is in Graphic mode 1 Press the ALT and ESC button simultaneously This will call up the Status display Pico Link station 2 controls the display of the GFX device TIP The activation of Terminal mode is indicated by the flashing star at the top right of the Status display ATTENTION In Terminal mode you can operate a device that may be positioned far from your actual location All access rights that you would also require locally are granted to you It is not always possible to obtain a view of the situation locally Use of this operating mode and the execution of any changes to device settings should only be carried out with the utmost caution A device with a display and keypad can also be operated locally In this case operat
203. ete entries It hinders transparency and leads to unwanted functions Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 114 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 HY01 A gt ON 02 gt OFF 05 HY01 A gt ON __ 03 gt OFF 09 HY01 A gt ON 01 gt OFF 28 HY01 A gt ON 25 12 gt OFF 26 12 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example 1 Year range selection The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on January 1 2002 and remain on until 23 59 on December 31 2005 Example 2 Month range selection The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on March 1st and remain on until 23 59 on September 30th Example 3 Day range selection The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on the 1st of each month and remain on until 23 59 on the 28th of each month Example 4 Holiday selection The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on December 25th each year and remain on until 23 59 on December 26th Christmas program Example 5 Time range selection The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00 00 on May 1st each year and remain on until 23 59 on October 31st Open air season HYO1l A HY01 B gt ON 01 05 gt ON gt OFF gt OFF 31 10 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 115 Example 6 Overlapping ranges The year time switch HY01 The year time switch HY01 channel A switches on at chan
204. etting for Pico GFX 70 is for RUN MODE to be displayed In other words Pico GFX 70 starts in RuN mone v when the power is switched on Startup behavior Menu display Status of Pico GFX 70 after startup Pico GFX 70 starts in STOP RUN MODE Pico GFX 70 is in STOP mode mode Pico GFX 70 starts in RUN RUN MODE v Pico GFX 70 is in RUN mode mode Behavior When the Circuit Diagram is Deleted The setting for the startup behavior is a Pico GFX 70 device function When the circuit diagram is deleted this does not result in the loss of the setting selected Behavior During Upload Download to Module or PC When a valid circuit diagram is transferred from Pico GFX 70 to a memory module or the PC or vice versa the setting is still retained IMPORTANT The GFX models without a display can only be started in RUN mode Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 18 Pico GFX 70 Settings DEBOUNCE Vy A P BUTTONS RUN MODE J CARD MODE y y Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Possible Faults Pico GFX 70 will not start in RUN mode a program is not available in Pico GFX 70 e you have selected Pico GFX 70 startup in STOP MODE RUN MODE menu Card Startup Behavior The startup behavior with memory module is for applications where unskilled personnel change the memory module under no voltage conditions Pico GFX 70 only starts in the Run mode if a memory module with a valid program is inserted
205. f simultaneously to avoid overheating the driver blocks in the worst possible case If in the event of an emergency stop the 24V dc power supply is to be switched off by means of a contact and if this would mean switching off more than one controlled output with an inductive load then you must provide suppressor circuits for these loads see the following diagrams Figure 2 37 Inductivity with suppressor circuit 24V Q S Short Circuit and Overload Behavior Should a short circuit or overload occur on a transistor output this output will switch off The output will switch on up to maximum temperature after the cooling time has elapsed This time depends on the ambient temperature and the current involved If the fault condition persists the output will keep switching off and on until the fault is corrected or until the power supply is switched off See Monitoring of Short Circuit and Overload with 1760 IB12XOB8 on page 8 7 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 32 Installation Connecting Analog Outputs 1760 IB12XOW4IOF and 1760 IB12XOB4IOF each have an analog output Q Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 01 OV dc to 10V de 10 bit resolution 0 to 1023 The analog output allows you to control servo valves and other final controlling elements ATTENTION Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals Consequently more care must be taken when laying and connecting th
206. f the timing relay T04 FB parameter QV display of value present at the function block output In order for the values to be displayed meaningfully ms milliseconds is entered in the Unit of measure field in the Number range format tab Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 22 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 5 17 Timing relay times Start Val Oms Setpoint 4000ms Act Val 1452ms Screen 3 Screen 3 shows an example of outputting analog values here IA3 on the display Note the Scaling range field on the Number range format tab The screen contains three numerical value that output the analog value in different formats The values are associated with the analog input IA3 Associated variable tab which has a value provided as a DWord variable at the QV output FB parameter All numerical values are assigned a value range from 0 to 1019 as this scan range is defined by the connected potentiometer Table 5 18 Numerical value analog value output Numerical value 1 Display of the analog value 0 to 1019 Display of the analog value with the scaling range 0 to 10 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt Numerical value 2 Display of the analog value with the scaling range 5 to 5 two decimal places unit of measure V Volt signed Numerical value 3 Figure 5 19 Analog value output Analog input I3 Figure
207. ft Pro The serial interface must be implemented using special cables The standard 1760 CBL 2M cable is 2m in length Maria The 1760 CBL 2M cable must not be lengthened in order ensute compliance with EMC requirements 2 _ iis LH 1 Remove the interface cover or other plugs from the interface 2 Fit the connectors in the devices Installation 2 39 ine j IMPORTANT It must be ensured in all circumstances that the connector with the marking POW Side is fitted in the interface of the GFX device The serial interface only functions if the GFX device is providing the power feed required for the interface cable Figure 2 46 Point to point serial interface POW Side Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 40 Installation Expanding Inputs Outputs Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 You can add expansion units to all GFX types with an expansion I O socket to increase the number of inputs and outputs Table 2 47 Pico Expansion 1 0 Modules Processor Unit 1 0 Modules Description 1760 LDF 1760 IA12XOW6l 12 AC inputs 6 relay outputs 1760 LDFA 1760 LDFC 1760 IB12X0B8 12 0 DC inputs 8 transistor outputs 1760 LDFCA 1760 IB12XOW6I 12 DC inputs 6 isolated relay outputs 1760 OW2 2 relay outputs 1 Four of the digital dc inputs can alternately be used as 0 to 10V dc analog inputs These inputs can be used as e
208. ft right arrow keys e Change the value at the cursor position Values using up down arrows keys Positions Cok Store entries Value at position GD Retain previous value Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 20 Overview Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Mounting Chapter 2 Installation The Pico GFX 70 must only be installed and wired by qualified electricians or other persons familiar with the installation of electrical equipment WARNING Danger of electric shock Never carry out electrical work on the device while the A power supply is switched on Always follow the safety rules e Switch off and isolate e Ensure that the device is no longer live e Secure against reclosing Short circuit and ground Cover adjacent live parts The Pico GFX 70 is installed in the following order e Mounting e Wiring the inputs e Wiring the outputs e Wiring the Pico Link if required e Setting up the serial interface if required e Connecting the power supply Install the display keypad of the GFX in the front of a control cabinet a service distribution board operator panel or in an enclosure Install the processor unit and the input output module so that all the terminals are protected against direct contact liquids and dust during operation When using the GFX without a display keypad snap it onto a DIN EN50022 DIN rail or fix it in place using mounting feet The GFX can
209. function coil or function block name coil or function block number as well as coil of the function block With coils of a Pico Link network station the network address is selected before the coil name Example relay coil output Relay coil for timing relay function block with control coil Relay coil of a Pico Link station A full list of all the contacts and relays is given in the overview starting on page 4 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 20 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Values for contacts and coil fields are changed in Entry mode The value to be changed flashes IMPORTANT Pico GFX 70 proposes the contact x 01 or the coil t Q 01 when starting entries in an empty field 1 Move the cursor using the arrow buttons to a contact or coil field 2 Press OK to switch to Entry mode 3 Use left and right arrow buttons to select the position you wish to change or press OK to jump to the next position 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to modify the value at the position Pico GFX 70 will leave Entry mode when you press left right or OK to leave a contact field or coil field In the contact field to change In the coil field change I 01 to I 02 Q 01 to S Q 08 I Ti I I De 04 rN Tal 8 T F lz Ay T i I K ir a Mo r 03 5 T K 13 OK OK Hil 14 R c t T D 5 44 k or or OK OK Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 21 Deleting Cont
210. g appropriate alarm messages Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 6 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Screen Editor Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IMPORTANT Unsaved entries will therefore be lost if a screen is activated that is associated with a particular event and the Force screen change option is active In this case while the associated variable is set by the program it is also not possible to carry out a screen change via the keypad In the List of activation values you can select whether the screen is to be activated by the set variable and at which value You process the individual screens in the Screen editor This provides the following different screen elements for selection e Static text e Bit display e Date and time e Bitmap e Numerical value e Value entry e Message text These screen elements are fully described in the following sections The Project info Program info and Screen info tabs are displayed if there are no screen elements activated The relevant tabs for a particular screen element ate shown if it is inserted in the screen Static Text Static text is a simple text display that is shown as soon as the screen is active Up to 16 normal font size characters can fit in one text field and up to 4 text lines can be arranged in rows The number of characters per text field and the number of displayable lines is halved if double font characters are used The Static text
211. gardless of the function Observe the setting of SEND IO See Send Each Change on the Inputs Outputs SEND IO on page 6 9 Write authorization to its own local outputs Write authorization to the network bit data SN 1 to 32 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 7 Configuring the Pico Link The Pico Link can be configured so that it can be optimized for your application Station Number The station number is identified as the Pico Link ID in the device The station number can be set on devices with a display using the buttons on the Pico GFX 70 IMPORTANT All the Pico Link settings are best carried out on station 1 The entire network can be configured via station 1 The configuration should only be carried out locally when a device is replaced Valid station numbers for operation are 01 to 08 Station number 00 factory default setting With station number 00 double address assignment cannot occur when an existing device is being exchanged Transmission Speed The Pico GFX 70 device hardware allows you set transmission speeds between 10 and 1000 kBaud in specific stages The length of all cables is determines the maximum permissible data transfer rate see Genera on page A 1 The data transfer rate is set under the BAUDRATE menu item Possible baud rates are 10 20 50 125 250 500 and 1000 KB 125 KB factory default setting Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 8 Pico Link and Point
212. ge e When the circuit diagram is deleted via the DELETE PROGRAM menu Transferring Retentive Behavior The setting for retentive behavior is a circuit diagram setting In other words the setting of the retentive menu may also under certain circumstances be transferred to the memory module or by uploading or downloading from the PC Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 25 Displaying Device Information Changing the Operating Mode or the Circuit Diagram When the operating mode is changed or the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram is modified the retentive data is normally saved together with their actual values The actual values of relays no longer being used are also retained Changing the Operating Mode If you change from RUN to STOP and then back to RUN the actual values of the retentive data will be retained Modifying the Circuit Diagram If a modification is made to the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram the actual values will be retained Changing the Startup Behavior in the SYSTEM Menu The retentive actual values are retained in Pico GFX 70 regardless of the setting Modification of the Retentive Range If the set retentive ranges are reduced only the actual values saved in the range will remain If the retentive range is extended the older data is retained The new data is written with the current actual values in RUN mode Device information is provided for service tasks and for de
213. ge 0 to 100 enter 0 as the minimum value and 255 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter as the unit of measure Activate the Scaling range field and enter 0 as the minimum value and 100 as the maximum value In order for example to display the value range 0 to 120 of a timing relay in minutes 0 to 2 min enter 0 as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter min as the unit of measure Enter 0 in the activated Scaling range field as the minimum value and 120 as the maximum value Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Numerical value screen element into the screen 2 Position the mouse over the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 20 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The height of the screen element frame depends on the font size selected Three sizes ate available e Normal font e Double font Quadruple font You can change the font size by activating the context menu right mouse button or by dragging the selection handle at the bottom edge of the element frame concerned When increasing the font size ensure that there is sufficient space available underneath the element The width of the screen element frame can be scaled as
214. gt 1 32768 gt 2 32767 The actual value at the analog input DCO1QV 1789 The scaled output value is 4137 Jumps Jumps can be used to optimize the structure of a circuit diagram or to implement the function of a selector switch For example jumps can be used to implement whether manual automatic mode or different machine programs are to be selected Jumps consist of a jump location and a jump destination label Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 120 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Circuit Diagram Symbols for Jumps Contact Make contact Numbers 01 to 32 Coils Numbers 01 to 32 Coil function ie i foe Fe t 1 can only be used as first leftmost contact Function If the jump coil is triggered the circuit connections coming directly after it will not be processed The states of the coils before the jump will be retained unless they are overwritten in circuit connections that were not missed by the jump Jumps are always made forwards i e the jump ends on the first contact with the same number as that of the coil e Coil jump when 1 e Contact only at the first left hand contact position Jump destination The Jump contact point will always be set to 1 IMPORTANT Backward jumps ate not possible with Pico GFX 70 due to the way it operates If the jump label does not come after the jump coil the jump will be made to the e
215. h to run data transfers between the two devices in both directions you must select the marker range on the active station BAUDRATE 19200B Serial Interface v REMOTE MARKER READ IMDOpIgILMD00 WRITE 1MD00 IMD00 Commissioning 3 23 8 Select the REMOTE MARKER menu item The following selection will only be displayed if the Serial Interface menu item has been ticked 9 Press the OK button The data is physically located in the second station i e the remote station IMPORTANT The active station reads and writes data from and to the markers of the remote station At the same time the remote station has read and write access to the same marker range Ensure that both stations do not have write access to the same markers simultaneously The last write operation will be the one that is retained Example READ 1MD2 gt 1MD2 WRITE 1MD3 gt 1MD3 The GFX device accesses the markers with station address 1xx These markers correspond to the local markers MD2 and MD3 in the remote station These marker double words contain MD2 MW3 MW4 MB5 MB6 MB7 MB8 M33 to M64 MD3 MW5 MW6 MB9 MB19 MB11 MB12 M65 to M96 The following marker ranges can be selected 1MD1 to 1MD20 This corresponds to the following range in the remote station MD1 to MD20 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 24 Commissioning 10 Press the OK button READ 1MD00
216. he circuit connections function blocks and their respective constants Table A 24 Pico Standard Memory Requirement Space requirement in Bytes per circuit connection function block per constant on the function block input Circuit connection 20 Function blocks A 68 4 AR 40 4 BC 48 4 BT 48 4 BV 40 4 C 52 4 CF 40 4 CH 52 4 Cl 52 4 CP 32 4 D 160 DC 96 4 DB 36 4 FT 56 4 GT 28 HW 68 4 per channel HY 68 4 per channel LS 64 4 LS 64 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Specifications A 21 Table A 24 Pico Standard Memory Requirement Space requirement in Bytes per circuit connection function block per constant on the function block input MR 20 NC 32 4 OT 36 4 PT 36 4 PW 48 4 SC 20 ST 24 4 T 48 4 VC 40 4 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 22 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A AC expansion units 2 17 Actual values 4 39 Add Circuit connections 3 8 Switching contact 3 7 Behavior 7 23 7 24 Break contact 4 4 Inverting 4 21 Bus termination resistor 2 34 Button ALT 3 8 DEL 3 8 OK 3 5 4 2 Buttons 1 8 C Cable cross sections 2 35 Cable length 2 21 2 35 Cable protection 2 19 Circuit connection Add new 3 8 Number 4 15 Circuit connections Deleting 4 22 4 25 Entering 4 21 Insert 4 23 Position in circuit diagram 4 15 Circuit diagram Checking
217. he OK button and select the station number using the up down NET ID 00 BAUDRATE 125KB arrows keys In this case the station number Pico Link ID 01 BUSDELAY 00 yY ee 7 Press the OK button REMOTE IO awh ok 8 Exit the NET PARAMETERS menu with ESC BAUDRATE 125KB BUSDELAY 00 SEND 10 v yY IMPORTANT The station designated station number 1 is the active REKRY station For this reason the REMOTE RUN and REMOTE IO functions are not available REMOTE IO Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 16 Commissioning Entering Network Stations Only the network station at physical location 1 with station number 1 has a station list IMPORTANT The left hand column is the physical location You can only assign a physical location to unused station numbers Physical location 1 is permanently assigned to station number 1 1 Use the up down arrow keys to select the STATION menu and press the OK button 2 Proceed to the station with physical address 2 3 Select the required physical location with the up down arrow keys Press 11 A a the OK button 3 0 4 0 v 4 Use up down arrow keys to select station number 2 5 Press the OK button 11 A 2 2 3O At physical location 2 the station has been assigned station address 2 4 0 6 Press ESC to return to the STATIONS menu item Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 NET PARAMETERS STATIONS CONFIGURE
218. he counter values 0 1 and 2 Counter value 0 activates screen 1 counter value 1 activates the first message text in screen 2 and counter value 2 the second message text in screen 2 When the timing relays T01 to T06 are reset the counter receives a pulse and is incremented by one value If the counter C01 reaches its upper setpoint with the second pass this starts the on delayed timing relay T08 This then resets the counter C01 to 0 after the set time has elapsed 0 8 s This loop is repeated continuously Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Two messages in screen_automatic screen change e60 Screen 1 The first screen contains four message text elements These are activated in succession via the outputs Q1 to Q4 and appear in the display Screen 2 The second screen contains a message text element with two message texts The message texts are activated via counter values 1 and 2 The first resetting of timing relays T01 to T06 by T06 also activates counter C01 which then reaches the value 1 The Error message text is then displayed This flashes since Flashing was set on the Display change tab and with function block parameter FB counter value lt 1 RESTART is displayed if the counter value of C01 is 2 Figure 5 39 Message text as status display Error RESTART Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine FE UNE Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 35 Me
219. he display keypad with front ring Table A 3 Protective Cover Mounting Specifications Specification Dimensions W x H x D 1760 NDC 86 5 mm x 95 mm x 25 mm 3 41 in x 3 74 in x 0 99 in Weight 36g 0 079 Ib Mounting Is fitted over the display keypad without front ring Table A 4 Processor Mounting Specifications processor unit Dimensions W x H x D 1760 LDF and 1760 LDFC 1760 LDFA and 1760 LDFCA 107 5 mm x 90 mm x 30 mm 4 23 in x 3 54 in x 1 18 in Weight 145g 0 32 Ib Mounting Fitted on the fixing shaft of the display or on the DIN rail to DIN 50022 35mm without display or by means of fixing feet without display Table A 5 I O Modules Mounting Specifications Specification Dimensions when fitted W x H x D 1760 IA12XOW4l 1760 IB12XOW4IF 1760 IB12XOWA4IOF 88 1 mm x 90 mm x 25 mm 3 47 in x 3 55 in x 0 99 in 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB410F Dimensions when removed W x H x D 88 1 mm x 90 mm x 44 mm 3 47 in x 3 55 in x 1 73 in Weight 150g 0 33 Ib 140g 0 32 Ib Mounting Snap fitted into the processor unit Specifications A 3 Figure A 1 Dimensions of the 1760 DU and 1760 DUB display keypad A 5 g m Tae ae i 3 y A ya E al aa y X i l Pas o Hit Y 3 js a i il Processor Unit Leto y jt 28 25 30 28 25 20 13 7 62 mal
220. he set point value The actual value changes and rises above the value of the set point value plus hysteresis The contact goes to the normal position e Range C Compare gt 11 gt gt 12 with offset This example behaves as described in Range A The offset value is added to the actual value e Comparison gt 11 gt 12 The contact switches on If the set point is exceeded with the actual value rising If the set point is undershot with the actual value decreasing The contact switches off If the hysteresis limit is exceeded with the actual value rising If the hysteresis limit is undershot with the actual value decreasing Arithmetic Function Block Pico GFX 70 provides 32 arithmetic function blocks ARO1 to AR32 The arithmetic function block is used for arithmetic operations All four basic arithmetic operations are supported e add e subtract e multiply e divide Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 44 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 and gt 12 can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value QV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA0
221. he switching state of the inputs and outputs It also indicates whether the processor is already running a program Note If another display is visible a visualization screen is shown TIP The examples were written without the use of expansion units If an expansion unit is connected the Status display will first show the status of the basic unit and then the status of the expansion unit before showing the first selection menu In this case Pico GFX 70 must be in STOP mode 1 2 Press OK to switch to the main menu Press OK to switch to the next menu level and press ESC to move one level back TIP OK has two other functions e Press OK to save modified settings e In the circuit diagram you can also press OK to insert and modify contacts and relay coils Press OK twice to enter the circuit diagram display via menu items PROGRAM gt PROGRAM This is where you will create the circuit diagram Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 6 Commissioning Te TTT TL Na L 1 C 1 B 7944 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Circuit Diagram Display The circuit diagram display is currently empty The cursor flashes at the top left which is where you will start to create your diagram The location of the cursor is indicated in the status line L Circuit connection line C Contact or coil contact B Free memory available in bytes Start valu
222. ide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Italic type is used for emphasis e Text in bold type indicates words or phrases you should type Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Preface 2 Related Documentation For Introduction to using PicoSoft Pro software The following documents contain information that may be helpful to you as you use Allen Bradley SLC products If you would like a manual you can e download a free electronic version from the internet e www theautomationbookstore com purchase a printed manual by contacting your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative visiting www theautomationbookstore com and placing your order calling 1 800 963 9548 USA Canada or 001 330 725 1574 Outside USA Canada Document Number 1760 QS002A EN P Read this Document Pico GFX 70 Controllers Quick Start Installation and mounting procedures for the processor Pico GFX 70 Processors Installation 1760 IN004A MU P Instructions Installation and mounting procedures for the display unit Pico GFX 70 Display Units Installation 1760 IN005A MU P Instructions Installation and mounting procedures for the I O modules Pico GFX 70 I O Modules Installation Instructions 1760 INOO6A MU P Installation and mounting procedures for the serial interface cable Pico GFX 70 Serial Inte
223. ifferent pulse and pause times Figure 5 38 Message text inverted flashing flashing via timer Q2 ON flashing via timer 02 ON Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine Start Machine E UNB RESTART Message Text Example Program 2 Activating Message Texts with a Timing Relay The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays T01 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time The screen activation is executed via counter C01 This has the value 1 as the upper setpoint SH The counter values 0 and 1 are therefore used as activation values for the two screens The resetting of timing relays TO1 to T06 by T06 activates counter C01 which then reaches the value 1 and therefore has already reached its upper setpoint This then causes screen 2 to be displayed The on delayed timing relay T08 resets counter C01 back to 0 after the set time 0 8 s has elapsed Screen 1 is then displayed again and timing relay T08 is no longer activated This loop is repeated continuously Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Message text_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 The first screen contains four m
224. il C C_ 2 upper set point value gt sn 3 preset actual value gt sv 4 lower set point value gt s 5 counting direction coil C D_ 6 accept preset actual value coil C SE 7 reset coil C RE 8 contact make contact C OF upper set point value reached exceeded 9 contact make contact C FB lower set point value reached undershot Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 73 10 actual value equal to zero 11 out of value range e Range A The counter has the value zero The contacts C ZE actual value equal to zero and C FB lower set point value undershot are active The counter receives counter values and increases the actual value C ZE drops out as well as C FB and also when the lower set point value is reached e Range B The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper set point value The upper set point value reached contact C OF becomes active e Range C The coil C SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the preset actual value The contacts go to the respective position e Range D The counting direction coil C D_ is actuated If counting pulses are present downward count is initiated If the lower set point value is undershot the contact C FB becomes active e Range E The reset coil C RE is activated The actual value is set to zero The contact C ZE is active e Range F The actual v
225. ime at station 1 physical location 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 18 Commissioning Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The NET parameters are modified as described for inputting parameters for the first time Station addresses in the STATIONS menu are changed as follows 1 Go to the physical location which is to be modified 2 Press the OK button IMPORTANT Existing station numbers can only be modified to free non assigned station numbers If all eight numbers are assigned all station numbers which are to be modified must be set to zero Thereafter all station numbers can be reassigned Pico GFX 70 sets all station numbers to zero which are assigned a physical location behind the leading zero 3 Select the required station number and confirm your input with the OK button 4 Configure all Pico Link stations again using the CONFIGURATION menu Purther information concerning the Pico Link network topic can be found in Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections on page 6 1 Displaying the Status Display of Other Stations On every device with a display you can display the states of the inputs and outputs of each network station 1I12 eeaeee ee I NT1 P MO 06 42 1Q1 RUN 3112 Taass I NT3 P MO 06 42 3Q1 3 6 RUN 3R12 Tesee 351 3 6 RUN Commissioning 3 19 Change to the Status display and press the ESC button
226. imensions of the 1760 LDF processor units A 4 Added Figure A 6 Dimensions of the 1760 RM Remote Processor A 4 modules Revised Table A 6 General Ambient Conditions A 5 and A 6 Revised Table A 7 Display keypad Specifications A 7 Revised Table A 8 Power Supply Specifications for DC Processors A 8 Added new catalog number and footnote to Table A 10 GFX 1 0 Modules A 10 Input Specifications Added new catalog number to Table A 11 GFX 1 0 Modules Relay Output A 11 Specifications Modified some of the text in Table A 18 Function Block Definitions A 17 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Summary of Changes 6 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Summary of Changes Preface Overview Installation Table of Contents Catalog Number Release Eistory 024 4 bop scw nis aaa tae s soc 3 New Dntornauctine desees tte belo Red sai e pee EA soc 4 Who Should Use this Manual ainsi edie site ee Wetee ena eee P 1 Purpose of this Manual 55 2 PisiG an aeee ae wate Da Raw Ho Id eos P 1 Common Techniques Used in this Manual 04 P 1 Related Do cumentaton on aaeeei a teeta st P 2 Chapter 1 MRE CC Use hiiia ano be aad a a O E gaan a A ES 1 1 Tmpropet Uses sa imarida daanan eann oaa a E Re dak 1 1 Product D sciptiof ssr types Ooo orena soida nein 4s 1 2 Component Veataressnc 3 nse ea es oR OE SOR 1 4 Catalog Number Reference pasa aenatada wees ears een nea eee 1 6 Pico GFX 70 Opeta ack sae etek wie te o
227. ing Relay Pico GFX 70 provides 32 timing relays from T 01 to T 32 A timing relay is used to change the switching duration and the make and break times of a switching contact The delay times can be configured between 5 ms and 99 h 59 min Wiring a Timing Relay You integrate a timing relay into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The function of the relay is defined via the parameter display The relay is started via the trigger coil T EN and can be selectively reset via the reset coil T RE The actual timeout running can be stopped via the third coil T ST Titi T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Figure 4 62 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with timing relay I 01 T 02EN I 02 T 02RE T 02Q1 Q 01 I 03 T 02ST Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 140 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 T 02 X M S gt I2 Qv gt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table 4 63 Parameter display and parameter set for timing relay T 02 Timing relay function block number 02 X On delayed mode M S Time range Minute Seconds Appears in the parameter display gt l1 Time setpoint value 1 gt I2 Time setpoint value 12 on a timing relay with 2 setpoint values OV gt Timed out actual time in RUN mode
228. ion at the device concerned is always faster than operation via Terminal mode Bear in mind that this may lead to conflicts that may trigger faults or unforeseen events Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 32 Commissioning IMPORTANT In Terminal mode the GFX device makes its display and keypad available to the connected device Only data for the display and the status of the buttons is sent via the connection This ensures that the local data of the connected device is not destroyed in the event of a communication fault 2 Close Terminal mode 3 Press the button to close the Terminal mode STATION ID 2 START MODE IMPORTANT The button cannot be assigned to other tasks if you wish to use Terminal mode in your application Use the button to change from the visualization to the Status display Otherwise the Terminal mode menu cannot be reached 4 Press the button This returns you back to your local device STATION ID 2 START MODE 5 Press the ESC button twice The Status display is active I 345 89 I P SA 06 47 ST Q24 TIP Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The flashing star at the top right of the display is no longer present The display must be initialized again if the processor was fitted to it under live conditions Press the DEL and ESC buttons simultaneously to reinitialize the display Pico GFX 70 Operation
229. ion rate 6 8 Configuration of the Serial Interface 6 18 Configuring input output devices 6 10 Connecting the Pico Link network 2 33 Data accesses via Serial Interface 6 17 Introduction to Serial Interface 6 16 Station message types 6 11 Station signs of life 6 12 Topology 6 3 6 16 Transfer behaviour 6 11 Transmission security 6 15 Network cables 2 36 0 Operating principles 1 8 Output relay 4 18 Overload 2 31 8 7 Monitoring 8 7 P P buttons 4 26 Activating and deactivating 7 15 Parameter display Counter relay 4 80 4 86 Timing relay 4 76 Parameters Change 7 9 Display 7 9 Inhibit access 7 9 Password Activation 7 4 Change 7 6 Deleting 7 6 Protection removal 7 7 Setup 7 2 Pause time 6 8 Power failure 3 2 Power flow display 3 10 3 11 4 27 Product Description 1 4 Program 8 1 Cycle 8 1 Load 8 10 Saving 8 10 publications related P 2 Purpose of this Manual P 1 related publications P 2 Relay coil Change 4 18 Coil function 4 19 4 33 Deleting 4 21 Entering 3 8 4 18 Relays Connecting the outputs 2 28 Index 3 Overview 4 9 4 12 4 15 Removing Inputs outputs 2 11 Processor unit 2 12 Reset 4 35 Retention Setting behaviour 7 23 Transferring behaviour 7 24 Retention requirements 7 23 Retentive behaviour 7 24 On circuit diagram transfer 7 25 Setting 7 23 RUN start behaviour 3 2 RUN STOP changeover 3 10 S Screw mounting 2 14 Sealing the protective cover 2 5 Sensor 20 mA connection 2
230. ish to send any change in input or output status immediately to all other network stations SEND IO should be activated if intelligent stations have read access to the inputs and outputs of other stations 21 02 8Q 01 etc SEND IO v This means that the quantity of messages on the network can increase significantly IMPORTANT If high speed counters are used the SEND IO function should be deactivated Otherwise the input data is written very rapidly onto the network as they change continuously leading to unnecessary loading of the network If intelligent devices are required to exchange bit information it should be implemented via RN and SN SEND IO factory default setting Automatic Change of the RUN and STOP Mode REMOTE RUN should be activated if stations 2 to 8 are to automatically follow the mode change of station 1 during operation IMPORTANT Input and output devices must always have SEND IO activated to ensure that station 1 always receives up to date input and output data IMPORTANT Intelligent stations with display only follow the l operating mode change when the display is showing the Status display or a text Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 10 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The following is of utmost importance during commissioning ATTENTION If several engineers are commissioning a machine or
231. ith a rising edge Memory Requirement of the Data Function Block The data block function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block input Retention Data function blocks can be operated with retentive actual values The quantity can be selected in the SYSTEM RETENTION menu Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 95 Function of the Data Function Block Figure 4 40 Signal diagram of data function block 1 value at input gt l1 2 trigger coil DB T_ 3 value on DB OV gt IMPORTANT The value at input gt 11 is only transferred with a rising trigger edge to an operand e g MD42 QA01 on output ev gt Output QV retains its value until it is overwritten PID Controller Pico GFX 70 provides 32 PID controllers DC01 to DC32 The PID controllers allow you to implement closed loop control functions ATTENTION A knowledge of closed loop control is required to use the PID controllers A The control system must be familiar so that the PID controller can function correctly Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 96 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 IMPORTANT Three separate manipulated variables can be output One manipulated variable can be output via an analog output Two manipulated variables can be processed via two pulse width modulated outputs It is therefore useful to run up to three closed loop controllers per program simultaneously Projects can be stru
232. ither digital or analog not both For example you could use 4 analog inputs plus 8 digital inputs Local Expansion Local expansion units are fitted directly next to the processor unit with the expansion I O socket connection Figure 2 48 Connecting local expansion units with Pico GFX 70 processors 1760 RPLCONN r t4 processor unit L L 4 expansion 0 ATTENTION The following electrical separation is implemented between the processor unit of the GFX device and the expansion unit separation always in local connection of expansion unit e Simple isolation 400V ac 10 e Safe isolation 240V ac 10 Units may be destroyed if the value 400V ac 10 is exceeded and may cause the malfunction of the entire system or machine IMPORTANT GFX processor units and expansion units can be fed by different DC power supplies Installation 2 41 Remote Expansion Expansion I O modules can be located remotely from the primary controller by using the Pico Link or serial interface See Configuring a Pico Link Network on page 3 14 and Configuring the Connection for the Terminal Mode on page 3 20 for more information Installing the Remote The ap processor is used for terminal mode operation of Pico controllers and I O modules The remote processor is used with either a Display or Processor Display Keypad Unit Figure 2 49 Remote P
233. k transfer 4 54 BV Boolean value Boolean operation 4 64 C counter counter relay 4 68 CF counter frequency Frequency counter 4 75 CH counter high speed High speed counter 4 79 Cl counter incremental value incremental encoder counter 4 85 encoder CP comparators Comparator 4 90 D display Text function block 4 92 DB data block Data block 4 93 DC DDC controller direct digital PID controller 4 95 control FT filter PT1 signal smoothing filter 4 101 GT GET GET value from the network 4 95 HW hora ja week 7 day time switch 4 106 HY horas year Year time switch 4 111 LS linear scaling Value scaling 4 115 MR master reset Master reset 4 122 NC numeric coding Numerical converter 4 123 OT operating time Operating hours counter 4 129 PT PUT PUT value to the network 4 130 PW pulse width modulation Pulse width modulation 4 132 SC synchronize clocks Synchronize time via network 4 135 ST set time Set cycle time 4 137 T timing relays Timing relay 4 139 VC value capsuling Value limitation 4 152 4 Jumps Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 18 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table A 19 Function Block Coils Coil Meaning of abbreviation Description C_ count input Counter input D_ direction input Count up down indicator ED enable Differential component Activate differential component E enable integral component Activate integral
234. kesaiasesesstasH CHO1D_ R CHO1SE CHO10F LQ 01 CHO1FB E Q 02 CHO1ZE L Q 03 CH01CY sm 94 Parameter display and parameter set for high speed counters CHO1 High speed counter function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display gt SH Upper set point gt SL Lower set point gt SV Defined actual value Preset QVv gt Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change set point values and or the preset value and enable of the parameter display Value Range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Behavior when value range is exceeded e The function block sets the switching contact CH CY to status 1 e The function block retains the value of the last valid operation IMPORTANT Counter CH counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact CH CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 81 Inputs The function block inputs gt sx gt su and gt sv can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 JA03 terminal I11 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Val
235. ks e Inputs outputs station status I R Q S transfers e Loading programs to and from every station The Pico Link is based on a CAN Controller Area Network system Each message type has its own ID The message priority is determined via the respective ID This is important in transmission borderline cases to ensure that all messages reach their destination Transfer Behavior Network CPU data transfer to program image The Pico GFX 70 network connection is equipped with its own CPU Network data can therefore be processed while the program is running After each program cycle the status of the network data is written to the operand image of the program and the send data is read from the image The program runs through the next cycle with this data Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 12 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Reading and sending the network data from the CPU The network CPU of the station reads every message on the network If the message is relevant to the station it is accepted into a message memory If the content of a send message changes it is sent Transmission only occurs when there is no message on the network The Pico Link is configured so that every station can send its messages This means that the station must observe a pause time between sending messages The pause time increases the higher the number of stations and the lowe
236. l I8 JAO3 terminal 111 JA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 142 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Variable Setpoint Values Behavior of the setpoint value when variable values are used e Variable values can be used e Variable values must be transferred using operands e With the time base s the value is accepted as a value in ms e The last position is rounded up to a zero or five e With the time base M S the value is accepted as a value in s e With the time base H M the value is accepted as a value in M minutes IMPORTANT The delay times are the same as described for the constants Example 669 Time base s The operand has the value 9504 The time value is 9 50s The Operand value is 45 507 The time value is 45 510s Time base M S The operand has the value 5999 The time value is 99 min 59s This is the maximum value Time base H M The operand has the value 5999 The time value is 99 hours 59 min Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts T 01Q1 to T 32Q1 Coils e TO1EN to T 32EN trigger coil e TOIRE to T 32
237. l binary 45 00101101 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 59 Comparison range 2 Value of marker range 2 decimal binary MD80 Byte 1 LSB 757 935405 00101101 001011010010110100101101 MD80 Byte 2 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 MD80 Byte 3 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 MD80 Byte 4 MSB 757 935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 MD81 Byte 1 LSB 757 935405 00101101 001011010010110100101101 MD81 Byte 2 757935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 MD81 Byte 3 757935405 001011000101 10110010110100101101 MD81 Byte 4 MSB 757 935405 00101101001011010010110100101101 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the value 757935405 is present in the marker double words MD80 and MD81 Example Transfer of marker byte range violation error The value of marker byte MB96 is to be transferred to MD93 MD94 MD95 and MD96 The length is 16 bytes Parameters of BT01 function block Source range gt 11 MD96 Destination range gt 12 MD93 Number of bytes gt No 18 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 60 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 IMPORTANT The transfer is in byte format MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes 18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length The error message Number of elements exceeds the destination range is output BTO1E1 is 1 Example Transfer of marker by
238. l the next cycle starts e Always wire forward or from top to bottom Never work backwards Example Self Latching with Own Contact Start condition Inputs I1 and I2 are switched on Q1 is switched off This is the circuit diagram of a self latching circuit If 11 and I2 are closed the switching state of relay coil Q 01 is latched via contact Q 01 e 1st cycle Inputs I1 and 12 are switched on Coil Q1 picks up e Contact Q 01 remains switched off since Pico GFX 70 evaluates from left to right The first coil field was already passed when Pico GFX 70 refreshes the output image in the 6th segment e 2nd cycle The self latching now becomes active Pico GFX 70 has transferred the coil states at the end of the first cycle to contact Q 01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 4 Inside Pico GFX 70 I 01 Q 04 L 8 C 2 B 7688 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example Do not Wire Backward This example is shown in Creating and Modifying Connections on page 4 21 It was used here to illustrate how NOT to do it In the third circuit connection Pico GFX 70 finds a connection to the second circuit connection in which the first contact field is empty The output relay is not switched When wiring more than four contacts in series use one of the marker relays Figure 8 1 Circuit diagram with M 01 marker relay I 01 Q 04 I 03 I 05 M 01 I 02 I 04 mM 01
239. lay has different coils and contacts Figure 4 31 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with frequency counter 1 a a CFO1EN CF010F LQ 01 CFO1FB I Q 02 CF01ZE L Q 03 Parameter display and parameter set for frequency countet CF01 Frequency counter function block number 01 Does not appear in the parameter display gt SH Upper set point gt SL Lower set point QVv gt Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change set point values and or the preset value and the enable of the parameter display Value Range The function block operates in the integer range from 0 to 5000 1 kHz 1 1000 Behavior when value range is exceeded The value range cannot be exceeded as the maximum measured value is less than the value range Inputs The function block inputs gt s and gt sx can have the following operands Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 77 e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 JA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled C
240. le Program 1 Different Display Formats The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The individual screens can be selected with the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program stat text_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 displays a static text in normal font size Screen 2 Screen 2 displays a static text enlarged Screen 3 Screen 3 shows three static texts in different font sizes Screen 4 Screen 4 shows three static texts arranged in rows Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 8 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Four static texts arranged in rows tt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Static Text Example Program 2 Different Display Formats with Password Request for One Screen The program consists of four screens in which the static text is displayed in different ways The fourth screen contains a password request The individual screens can be selected with up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 The defined password is requested when exiting screen 4 In this case it is the number 2 which has to be confirmed with OK Further scrolling through the screens cannot be done without entering the correct password You can leave
241. lready assigned an address If a spur line is removed on a station all other devices in the network remain functional THT Tae The spur line between the T connector and the device must not exceed 0 3 m Otherwise communication via the Pico Link may be impaired Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 3 Topology and Addressing Examples Physical Station Loop through the location number unit place Example Example 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 8 5 5 7 6 6 2 7 7 6 8 8 5 T connector and spur line Pico GFX Pico GFX Pico GFX Pico GFX Pico GFX Pico GFX _ i Pico GFX e Example 1 physical location is the same as the station number e Example 2 physical location is not the same as the station number apart from location 1 being the same as station 1 IMPORTANT Physical location 1 is always assigned as station 1 Station 1 is the only station which must be present Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 4 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Position and Addressing of the Operands via the Pico Link Stations Basic unit Local expansion Network bit data Network word data Input Output Input Output Input Output Receive Send l Q R S RN SN 1 111t016 1Q1to8 1R1t0o16 1S1to8 2to8RN 1 to 32 2 to 8 SN 1 to 32 GT 1 to 32 PT 1 to 32 2
242. ltage of 250V ac on a relay contact If the voltage exceeds this threshold flashover may occur at the contact resulting in damage to the device or a connected load Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 30 Installation Connecting Transistor 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12X0B410F Outputs Figure 2 35 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB4I0F transistor outputs Lt ss am es ae 1760 IB12X0B8 Figure 2 36 1760 IB12XOB8 transistor outputs R ee oo 24V 24V 0 5A 0 5A 20 4 28 8 V swrav Parallel connection Up to four outputs can be connected in parallel in order to increase the power The output current will increase in this case to a maximum of 2 A Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Installation 2 31 Outputs may only be connected in parallel within a group Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8 S1 to S4 or S5 to S8 such as Q1 and Q3 or Q5 Q7 and Q8 Outputs connected in parallel must be switched at the same time gt ATTENTION Please note the following when switching off inductive loads Suppressed inductive loads cause less interference in the entire electrical system For optimum suppression the gt i suppressor circuits are best connected directly in the proximity of the inductive load If inductive loads are not suppressed the following applies Several inductive loads should not be switched of
243. lue limitation function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the Value Limitation Function Block IMPORTANT The function block must be enabled so that it can work Coil VC EN is active If coil VC EN is not active the entire function block is deactivated and reset The output value is set to zero The value is accepted at input VC I1 if the enable coil is active If the value is greater than the upper limit value or less than the lower limit value the respective limit value is output at VC QV Example with Timing Relay and Counter Function Block A warning light flashes when the counter reaches 10 In the example both function blocks C 01 and T 01 are wired Figure 4 78 Hardwiring with relays LO1 Counter 2s Value 10 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 155 Figure 4 79 Wiring with the Pico GFX 70 01 kijani D2 6 01 I 05 c 01c I 06 C 01RE C 01 T 01EN T 01Q1 Q 01 Entering function block parameters from the circuit diagram You can access the parameter entry from the contact as well as from a coil 1 Enter the circuit diagram up to 01 as a coil Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 156 Wiring with Pico GFX 70
244. lue scaling function blocknumber27 SS Appears in the parameter display gt l1 Input value actual value source range gt X1 Lower value of source range gt Y1 Lower value of target range gt X2 Upper value of source range gt Y2 Upper value of target range OV gt Output value scaled Inputs The function block inputs gt 11 gt x1 gt x2 gt 1 and gt y2 can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 IA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 IA04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Output The function block output QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 117 Value Range for Inputs and Outputs Value range gt l1 Input value of the function block 2147483648 to 2 147483647 gt X1 Lower value of source range gt X2 Lower value of target range gt Y1 Upper value of source range gt Y2 Upper value of target range QV gt Output value Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Coil VCO1EN to VC32EN function block enable Memory Requirement of the LS Function Block The LS function block requires 64 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input Function of the LS Function Block IMPORTANT
245. m aaea hae ieal aha AEA 7 9 Adjustable Parameters for Function Blocks 7 10 Setting Date Time and Daylight Savings Time 7 11 Changing Between Winter Summer time DST 7 12 Selectie ISS Meas ah eee aE OR oe Wee 4 Pied MARE ea Ke eee 7 13 Activating Input Delay debounce 0 ein eek eee co eeas 7 14 Deactivating Debounce input delay 00048 7 14 Activating and Deactivating the P Buttons ic ceca es 7 15 Activating the P Buttons 4 4 soit ae ekeni eee OP Es 7 15 Deactivating the P Buttons 5 tte esc incteetrt o Mim ve a cece eh 7 16 Startup Beh avi0tisti5 j josie SERP Sopa a a es 7 16 Setting the Startup Behavior iiss sntecha balan eedd od econ 7 16 Behavior When the Circuit Diagram is Deleted 7 17 Behavior During Upload Download to Module or PC 7 17 Possible Pauls tresna trana ate wan ce eh tae perks Hee ae 7 18 Card Startup BehaviOtini cpacacet enh ea eee eines 7 18 Terminal ES gic tN a a cent A Dt cc acd ek 7 19 Setting LCD Contrast and Backlight aan tree has wh thet 7 20 Retention egaa iiaa ia EO n o rE de een Stortnad tel ok bean eho aha 7 22 Requirements sovoia sata eod iera tye ie gi iono shidies 4 7 23 Setting Retentive Behavior 4k oo eeew eo hee jee Sg 7 23 Deleting RANG Ss 5 Sas tle rae Re oun Rae TAA ha Tene D 7 24 Deleting Retentive Actual Values of Markers and Function Blocks i dati ate eet dear duces 7 24 Transferring Retetitive Behavior ia
246. mber range format tab Input 101 is assigned make contact bit logic in the Operability tab The value is written to marker word 7 and accepted by counter input SH Q1 is set to 1 if the counter actual value QV is greater than or equal to the upper setpoint SH If the actual value already has a higher value than the switch value you can reset the counter via 12 Q1 is immediately reset to 0 and is not active again until the switch value is reached Screen 2 Screen 2 illustrates the activation of the value entry via the set variable marker word MW05 preset actual value SV After you have entered a new value this is written to marker word MW05 by actuating I1 This is associated with the preset actual value SV of counter C02 When transferred the actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value Figure 5 28 Transfer of value when 11 closes Set entry 80 Transfer of value Set Set Qv Entry 0K Qv Entry 0K 304 80 80 80 Transfer I1 Transfer I1 Screen 3 Screen 3 shows an example from the Number range format tab particularly the Scaling range area and Input format area gt Allow digit selection You can enter any value from 0 00 to 10 00 Allow digit selection After I1 closes the preset actual value SV is transferred When transferred the actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value The maximum scaling range 10 00 is assigned to the ma
247. me Synchronization The maximum time deviation between the functional stations is 5 s ST01 gt I1 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 137 Set Cycle Time Pico GFX 70 provides one set cycle time function block ST01 The set cycle time function block is a supplementary function block for the PID controller The set cycle time function block provides a fixed cycle time for processing the circuit diagram and the function blocks Wiring a Set Cycle Time Function Block The ST set cycle time function block is integrated in the circuit diagram as a coil MTAA T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Figure 4 60 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with enabling of set cycle time function block seweuredwedeucedeeseeseeeedeueS STOLEN Parameter display for set cycle time ST01 Set cycle time function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display gt I Set cycle time The parameter display is used to modify the set cycle time the minimum on time and the enabling of the parameter display Table 4 61 Time Range Parameter Value and time range Resolution 11 0 to 1000 ms Inputs The function block input gt 11 can be assigned the following operands e Constants Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 138 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to
248. mote Processor Features 00000000 00000000 1 24V dc Voltage supply 2 Interface with cover Terminal for connecting cable Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 6 Overview 1 0 Modules Figure 1 4 1 0 Module Features 1 2 1 Inputs 2 Analog output optional 3 Outputs Catalog Number Reference Table 1 1 Pico GFX 70 Catalog Number Listing Catalog Number GFX 1 0 Modules Description Pieces per Package E 1760 1AT2xOWAl 12 120 240V ac inputs 4 relay output analog input 1760 IB12XOW4IF 12 24V dc inputs 4 relay output analog input 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 12 24V dc inputs 4 relay outputs analog input and output 1760 IB12X0B4IF 12 24V dc inputs 4 transistor outputs analog input 1760 IB12XOB4I0F 12 24V dc inputs 4 transistor outputs analog input and output Expansion I O Modules 1760 IA12XOW6l 12 120 240V ac inputs 6 relay outputs 1760 IB12X0B8 12 24V dc inputs 8 transistor outputs B 1760 181 2XOWE6l 12 24V dc inputs 6 relay outputs 1760 OW2 2 relay outputs Processor Units 1760 LDF DC Processor 1760 LDFC DC Processor with Pico Link Terminal 1760 LDFA AC Processor 1760 LDFCA AC Processor with Pico Link Terminal 1760 RM GFX Remote Processor Programming Software and Cab
249. mplemented using the serial interface or the Pico Link IMPORTANT TERMINAL MODE operation is only possible if the GFX is in STOP mode Permanent TERMINAL MODE Setting In the SYSTEM menu you set the GFX to start in TERMINAL MODE when the power supply is switched on Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GFX 70 on page 7 5 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 20 Pico GFX 70 Settings Activating an Automatic Startup in TERMINAL MODE Requirement The GFX is in RUN or STOP mode without visualization the System menu must be reachable 1 Select TERMINAL MoDE in the System menu and press OK P BUTTONS A RUN MODE 2 The next time that the GFX is started it will establish the connection to CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE V the selected device 3 Press ESC to return to the Status display IMPORTANT The correct station number must be selected in order for the GFX to start TERMINAL MODE with the correct station see Commissioning on page 3 1 Deactivating an Automatic Startup in TERMINAL MODE P BUTTONS A RUN MODE 1 Select TERMINAL MODE V CARD MODE TERMINAL MODE WV 2 Press OK The automatic starting in TERMINAL MODE has been deactivated The default setting of the GFX is for the display of the TERMINAL MODE menu i e GFX starts in
250. n associated variable Q2 OFF Q2 ON Screen 4 Screen 4 is basically the same as screen 3 except that it also includes the Visibility element The message text can be made invisible via input 11 The setting for this was made in the Visibility tab Make contact bit logic is selected With break contact bit logic the message text element is made visible when actuating I1 Figure 5 35 Hiding a message text 11 not actuated 11 actuated invisible via I1 via I1 Q2 ON Invisible Screen 5 Screen 5 is basically the same as screen 4 except that the Invisible function has been replaced with Flash as the Display change function When input I2 1 make contact bit logic the message text can be made to flash Figure 5 36 Message text flashing 12 not actuated 12 actuated flashing flashing via I2 via I2 Q2 ON Q2 OFF Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 33 Screen 6 Screen 6 is basically the same as screen 5 except that Inverted was selected for the Display change function When input I2 1 make contact bit logic the message text in this screen can thus be inverted Figure 5 37 Message text inverted 12 not actuated 12 actuated invert invert via I2 via I2 Q2 ON Screen 7 Screen 7 is basically the same as screen 6 except that the inverted display is controlled by timing relay TO7 asynchronous clock pulse The text flashes in the display at d
251. nd of the circuit diagram The last circuit connection will also be skipped If a jump destination is not present the jump is made to the end of the circuit diagram Multiple use of the same jump coil and jump contact is possible as long as this is implemented in pairs i e Coil 1 jumped range Contact 1 Coil 1 jumped range Contact 1 etc Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 121 ATTENTION If circuit connections are skipped the states of the coils are retained The time value of timing relays that have been A started will continue to run Power Flow Display Jumped ranges are indicated by the coils in the power flow display All coils after the jump coil are shown with the symbol of the jump coil Example A selector switch allows two different sequences to be set e Sequence 1 Switch on Motor 1 immediately e Sequence 2 Switch on Guard 2 Wait time then switch on Motor 1 Contacts and relays used e I1 Sequence 1 o 2 Sequence 2 e 13 Guard 2 moved out e 112 Motor protective circuit breaker switched on e Q1 Motor 1 e Q2 Guard 2 e T 01 Wait time 30 00 s on delayed D 01 Text motor protective circuit breaker tripped Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 122 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 MR16 Q Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Circuit diagram Power flow display I 01 selected I 01 01 I 01 01 I 02 02 I 02
252. nel B switches on at 00 00 on the 3rd of the 00 00 on the 2nd in the months 5 6 7 8 9 10 and months 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 remains on until 23 59 on and remains on until 23 59 the 25th of these months on 17th of these months HY01 A HY01 B gt ON 03 05 gt ON 02 06 gt OFF 25 10 gt OFF 17 12 Total number of channels and behavior of the contact HY01Q1 The time switch will switch on at 00 00 from the 3rd May and off at 23 59 on the 25th May In June July August September October the time switch will switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd of the month and switch off at 23 59 on the 17th In November and December the time switch will switch on at 00 00 on the 2nd of the month and switch off at 23 59 on the 17th Value Scaling Pico GFX 70 provides 32 value scaling function blocks LSO1 to LS32 The function block enables you to convert values from one value range to another one In this way it is possible to reduce or increase values Wiring of a Scaling Function Block You can integrate a value scaling function block into your circuit as a coil Figure 4 50 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with LS value scaling M 48 LS27EN Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 116 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 LS27 QVv gt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Parameter Display and Parameter Set for the LS Function Block LS27 LS va
253. nge M S 1s Range H M 1 min Circuit connections 256 Contacts in series 4 Coil per circuit connection 1 Program memory for program circuit 8 KB diagram Program memory for display objects 24 KB visualization RAM working memory 8 KB Storage of programs retentive FRAM Retentive memory retentive data retentive FRAM Size 200 byte Operating hours counter 16 byte Write read cycles FRAM minimum 1010 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 10 Specifications i Table A 10 GFX I O Modules Input Specifications 17 18 111 112 gt 8V de Specification 1760 IB12XOWAIF 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 1760 IA12X0W4I 1760 IB12XOB4IF 1760 IB12XOB410F Number of digital inputs 12 1 12 Inputs usable as analog inputs I7 18 111 112 400 0 Inputs usable as high speed inputs 11 12 13 14 4 0 Rated voltage 24V de 120 240V ac Off state voltage 11 to I6 and 19 to 110 lt 5V de 0 to 40V ac 17 18 111 112 lt 8V de On state voltage 11 to l6 and 19 to 110 gt 15V de 79 to 264V ac On state current 11 to 16 19 to 110 at 24V de 3 3 mA 17 18 111 112 at 24V de 2 2 mA 115V ac 0 2 mA 230V ac 0 5 mA Signal delay Debounce On 20 ms Debounce Off typical 11 to 14s 0 025 ms 15 16 19 110 0 25 ms 17 18 111 112 0 15 ms 0 to 1 10 ms 1 to 0 100 ms Electrical Isolation To supply voltage No Between each other No To the outputs Yes To P
254. nning the program in RUN mode Commissioning 3 3 Creating your First Circuit The following single line diagram takes you step by step through wiring up Di ram your first circuit diagram In this way you will learn all the rules quickly agra enabling you to use Pico GFX 70 for your own projects As with conventional wiring you use contacts and relays in the Pico GFX 70 diagram With Pico GFX 70 however you no longer have to connect up components individually At the push of a few buttons the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram produces all the wiring required All you have to do is then connect any switches sensors lamps or contactors you wish to use Figure 3 1 Lamp controller with relays LO1 F1 S1 K1 S2 p H1 K1 Q9 L01 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 4 Commissioning In the following example Pico GFX 70 carries out all the wiring and performs the tasks of the circuit diagram shown below Figure 3 2 Lamp controller with GFX LO1 LO1 TI Di I D2 8 01 oOo Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 PROGRAM STOP Y RUN PARAMETERS SET CLOCK CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FUNCTION RELAYS Commissioning 3 5 Starting Point Status Display When you switch on Pico GFX 70 it opens the Status display immediately to show t
255. normally be 32 x 32 pixels in size to fully utilize the optimum brilliance of the display The time from reading the inputs and outputs to switching contacts in the circuit diagram can be set in Pico GFX 70 via the delay time This function is useful for example to ensure a clean switching signal despite contact bounce Figure 8 2 Pico GFX 70 input assigned a switch A OSSOS oV 1 Delay Times for the GFX Inputs The delay time for DC signals is 20 ms Figure 8 3 Delay times for Pico GFX 70 DC An input signal S1 must therefore be 15Vor 8V DA for at least 20 ms on the input terminal before the switch contact will change from 0 to 1 A If applicable this time must also include the cycle time B since Pico GFX 70 does not detect the signal until the start of a cycle Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 6 Inside Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The same debounce delay C applies when the signal drops out from 1 to 0 IMPORTANT If you use high speed counter function blocks the debounce delay time for the inputs is 0 025 ms Otherwise it is not possible to count high speed signals If the debounce is switched off Pico GFX 70 responds to an input signal after just 0 25 ms Figure 8 4 Switching behavior with input debounce disabled Typical delay times with the debounce delay disabled are e On delay for I1 to 14 0 025 ms 15 to 112 0 25 ms e Off delay
256. ns 6 17 Establishing a Serial Interface connection to a Pico Link station Figure 6 6 Pico Link operation and Serial Interface connections loc GFX 70 oo GFX 70 l GFX 70 GFX 70 A Serial Interface connection can be established with a Pico Link station The same conditions apply here as with operation without Pico Link Data accesses via Serial Interface The following data access operations are possible from the active station to the remote station Active station read Remote station Inputs 1101 to 1116 101 to 116 Inputs of local expansion unit 1R1 to 1R16 R01 to R16 Outputs 1001 to 1008 Q01 to 008 Outputs of local expansion unit 1801 to 1808 01 to S08 Pico Link diagnostics bits 1ID01 to 11D08 ID01 to IDO8 Analog inputs 11A01 to 11A04 IA01 to 1A04 Analog output 10A01 OA01 Write read accesses in the marker range Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 18 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Active station Remote station MD01 MD01 1 MW01 1MW02 MW01 MW02 1MB01 1MB02 1MB03 1MB04 MB01 MB02 MB03 MB04 1 M01 to 1 M32 M01 to M32 MDO02 MD
257. ns in the Network 5 0 6 6 Possible Write and Read Authorization in the Network 6 6 Configuring the Picd Link 00sec 55a eis SR Fae S 6 7 Staion Number srede eane eea a eh eaten a a bc 6 7 Transmission Speed sone ants sii ak E EAEE AA 6 7 Pause Time Changing the Write Repetition Rate Manually 6 8 Send Each Change on the Inputs Outputs SEND IO 6 9 Automatic Change of the RUN and STOP Mode 6 9 Input Output Device REMOTE IO Configuration 6 10 Station Message Types averted ered hes os de 6 11 Transfer Behaviot oe kur En ranee an E deem oaG eae 6 11 Signs of Life of the Individual Stations and Diagnostics 6 12 Network Transmission Security ss paecend ene eee eens 6 15 Pico GFX 70 Settings Inside Pico GFX 70 Table of Contents 5 Introduction to the Serial Intercession eas a iin 6 16 DO PONG OY oof teeing i ene pare quad oon aang wend pares 6 16 Configuration of the Serial Interface vee bh ka Ss tern whens 6 18 Chapter 7 Passwort ProrectiOn eeo Suu Me terete BOE WAY fats cee tains 7 1 Password Setup cus cneieii ia deko eae ee ed ile ee eed areas 7 2 Selecting the Scope of the Password 0 000 000 08 7 3 Activating the Password icici hess ee tae Bee eR ESS 7 4 Unlocking Piso GFX 70r iori eaave arende nne aE reed 7 5 Changing or Deleting the Password Range 0 7 6 Changing the Menu Latiovage iki ue ees oO 4 Se rreren 7 8 Changing Parameters city secinit
258. nsert the screwdriver into the lug of the fixing shaft catch 2 Lever out the slide catch 3 Pull out the processor unit from the fixing shafts Installation 2 13 Mounting on a DIN Rail The processor unit can be mounted on a DIN rail without the display keypad The fastening catches must be removed in order to mount the device on a fastened DIN rail 1 Remove the spring with a screwdriver 0 mn 2 Pull the slide catch out of the guide and remove it Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 14 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 Hook the Pico GFX 70 to the top edge of the DIN rail and hinge into place while pressing down slightly 4 Press down lightly on both the device and the DIN rail until the unit snaps over the lower edge of the DIN rail The Pico GFX 70 will clip into place automatically 5 Check that the device is seated firmly The device is mounted vertically on a DIN rail in the same way Screw Mounting The processor unit can be screwed onto a mounting plate without the display keypad For screw mounting on a moun
259. of station 4 is to switch the output Q1 of station 3 via the network Both stations have a circuit diagram Figure 6 2 Circuit diagram in station 4 Set coil 01 in station 3 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 6 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Functions of the Stations in the Network The stations on the Pico Link can have two different functions e Intelligent stations with their own programs stations 1 to 8 e Input output devices REMOTE IO without their own program stations 2 to 8 IMPORTANT Station 1 must always have a circuit diagram Possible Write and Read Authorization in the Network The stations have differing read and write authorization on the Pico Link according to their functions and configuration Station 1 Authorized read access to all inputs and outputs of all stations regardless of the function Observe the setting of SEND IO See Send Each Change on the Inputs Outputs SEND IO on page 6 9 Authorized write access to the station s own local outputs Authorized write access to the physical digital outputs of the stations which are functioning as input output devices Write authorization to the network bit data 2 to 8 SN 1 to 32 Stations 2 to 8 Input output device function No read and write authorization Intelligent station function Authorized read access to all inputs and outputs of all stations re
260. ogram consists of eight screens that can be selected by the up and down cursor buttons The screen change was defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 This program uses simple examples to explain the bitmap display options available Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Bitmap_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 shows a bitmap without any particular features small display Screen 2 Screen 2 contains a bitmap in large display format The Bitmap flashing field of the Display tab shows an association via the Boolean operand I1 If I1 is actuated the Bitmap flashes Figure 5 9 Flashing bitmap Large Large a blinking blinking by by Tit Tit Normal AA aD O covering background ai transparent background Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 17 Screen 3 Screen 3 contains three bitmaps that are arranged in different sizes next to each other Screen 4 Screen 4 contains two bitmaps that are arranged in different sizes next to each other The Invert Bitmap Display check box activates the inverted display Screen 5 Screen 5 contains one bitmap The Visibility tab controls the bitmap I1 is used to make the bitmap invisible Figure 5 10 Switch invisible function invisible by itil Screen 6 Screen 6 contains only one bitmap The Invert Bitmap Display check box is activated in the Display tab In the Visibility tab the a
261. oint value exceeded Overflow CH OF 01 04 4 79 High speed counter function block lower set point value undershot below Fall CH FB X 01 04 4 79 High speed counter function block actual value equal to zero CH ZE X 01 04 4 79 High speed counter function block actual value has exceeded counter range CARRY CH CY X 01 04 4 79 Incremental encoder counter function block upper set point value exceeded Overflow CI OF X 01 02 4 85 Incremental encoder counter function block lower set point value undershot Fall below CI FB X 01 02 4 85 Incremental encoder counter function block actual value equal to zero CI ZE X 01 02 4 85 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 8 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table 4 2 Contacts Contact Make Break Number Page contact contact Incremental encoder counter function CI X CY CI x CY X 01 02 4 85 block actual value has exceeded counter range CARRY Comparator function block CP X LT CP X LT X 01 32 4 90 less than Comparator function block CP X EQ CP X EQ X 01 32 4 90 equal to Comparator function block CP X GT CP X GT X 01 32 4 90 greater than Text output function block D X Q1 D X
262. on 4 Select the COM menu option E 5 Press the down arrow button COM LINK 6 Press the OK button Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 3 22 Commissioning BAUDRATE 96008 Serial Interface REMOTE MARKER BAUDRATE 19200B Serial Interface REMOTE MARKER BAUDRATE 19200B Serial Interface v REMOTE MARKER Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The menu BAUDRATE 9600B will appear The two baud rates are for 9600 ot 19200 baud Select the baud rate that your connection will support Baud Rate Selection IMPORTANT Select 19200 baud as the baud rate Badly laid cables may give tise to electromagnetic interference Select 9600 baud as the baud rate If this is not satisfactory the connection cable must be laid in a different location 1 Press the OK button 2 Select 19200 baud as the baud rate 3 Press the up down arrow button 4 Confirm with the OK button 5 Switch on the COM connection THRE The Serial Interface must only be switched at the active station Two devices with Serial Interface v switched on cannot communicate with each other 6 Press the press the down arrow button 7 Press the OK button The tick on the Serial Interface menu item indicates that Serial Interface has been selected No tick means that Serial Interface has not been selected IMPORTANT The following applies to the active station If you wis
263. on D oe 2 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 DEL Delete object in circuit diagram Cursor buttons up down left right Select menu items Set contact numbers contacts and values OK Next menu level Save your entry ESC Previous menu level Cancel ALT Special functions in circuit diagram Status display Toggle between visualization display and Status display close Terminal mode In visualization applications the keypad can be used for other functions than the ones stated above In this case the buttons are assigned the function selected in the application The standard button functions are only restored when you leave the application Moving Through Menus and Choosing Values Show System menu Go to next menu level Select menu item Activate modify save your entry Return to last menu level Cancel your entry since the last OK up down Change menu item Change value left right Change place Function of P buttons left Input P1 up Input P2 right Input P3 down Input P4 Reset the MFD display Overview 1 9 Selecting Main and System Menu Status Display Te 12S et areolar P ma and amp MO 02 00 a RS Mo Q 34 STOP S 2 6 No password amp Current selection PROGRAM SECURITY flashes in STOPY RUN SYSTEM the Pico GFX 70 PARAMETERS MENU LANGUAGE menu SET CLOCK CONFIGURATOR 1st menu level 1st men
264. on and drag the Bitmap screen element into the screen This will open the Picture File Selection dialog Por the optimum display of the graphic file select one of the three conversion processes provided in the Conversion Type area The Preview shows the selected bitmap and the conversion result PicoSoft Pro always generates the optimum black and white bitmap graphic for display on the monochrome Pico GFX 70 display You can also support PicoSoft Pro by optimizing the graphic file 2 Position the mouse over the screen element and move it to the required position with the left mouse button depressed Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 16 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The height and width of the element frame is variable and can be adjusted accordingly by enlarging or reducing the screen element frame vertically horizontally or diagonally This is done holding down the left mouse button and dragging a selection handle of the element frame The side ratios of the original graphic are retained when you use the diagonal zoom function Display tab The Display tab provides the following display formats for the bitmap e Flashing via associated variable e Background transparent or covered e Inverted Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible via an associated variable Bitmap Example Program 1 Bitmap Display The pr
265. ontacts e CFO1OF to CFO4OF Actual value 2 Upper set point e CFO1FB to CFO4FB Actual value Lower set point e CFO1ZE to CF04ZE Actual value Zero Coils CFO1EN to CFO4EN enable of the counter with coil status 1 Memory Requirement of the Frequency Counter The frequency counter function block requires 40 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention The frequency counter does not retain actual values as the frequency is re measuted continuously Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 78 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Function of the Frequency Counter Function Block Figure 4 32 Signal diagram of frequency counter 1 ty to pa C pa E ppa hs Aa Tes 1 counter input 11 to 14 2 upper set point value gt sH 3 lower set point value gt sL 4 enable CF EN 5 contact make contact CF OF upper set point value exceeded 6 contact make contact CF FB lower set point value undershot 7 actual value equal to zero CF ZE tg gate time for the frequency measurement Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 79 e The first measurements are made after the CK EN enable signal has been activated The value is output after the gate time has timed out e The contacts are set in accordance with the measured frequency e If the CR EN enable signal is removed the output value is set to zero High Speed Counters Pico GFX 70 provid
266. ower failure the data will be retained until the next time it is overwritten or deleted Memory Module Each memory module contains a circuit diagram which is inserted into the Pico GFX 70 interface The Pico GFX 70 behaves in the following manner in accordance with the type and setting Requirement A valid circuit diagram must be stored on the card Variants with display Go to the CARD menu and load the circuit diagram into the unit in STOP mode via CARD DEVICE See CARD MODE setting in Card Startup Behavior on page 7 18 Variants without display If the circuit diagram on the card is different to the circuit diagram in the device the program from the card is loaded as soon as the power supply is turned on PicoSoft Pro PicoSoft Pro is a PC program for creating testing and managing Pico GFX 70 programs visualization applications and circuit diagrams Completed programs are exchanged between the PC and Pico GFX 70 via the connection cable Once you have transferred a circuit diagram you can start Pico GFX 70 straight from your PC Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 18 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Working with Contacts and In Pico GFX 70 circuit diagrams the switches buttons and relays of R elays conventional circuit diagrams are connected up using input contacts and relay coils Conventional circuit Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram Pico GFX 70 connection Connect make contact S1 to input termin
267. perand is displayed Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 33 e gt J1 Actual value of counter C 01 e gt 2 Constant 1095 e QV gt Marker double word MD56 3 Press the ALT button again The display shows the values Coil Functions You can set the coil function to determine the switching behavior of relay coils The following coil functions are assigned to all coils Table 4 17 Coil Function Pico GFX 70 display J Me Coil function Contactor function Impulse relay function Set Reset Contactor function with negated result Cycle pulse with rising edge Cycle pulse with falling edge Example Q01 D02 S04 01 M07 JQ03 M04 D08 S07 01 SQ08 SM02 SD03 SS04 RQ04 RM05 RDO7 RSO3 Q06 M96 pmo M42 IMPORTANT The function block descriptions state which coil functions can be used with the function block concerned Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 34 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Rules for Wiring Relay Coils Relay with contactor function IMPORTANT A coil should only be used once to retain an overview of the relay states However retentive coil functions such as s R J can be used several times The following applies to non retentive coil functions such as contactor 1 negated contactor J rising and falling edge detection Each coil must only be used once The last coil in the cir
268. play L 001 C 1 RUN In the power flow display energized connections are thicker than non energized connections You can follow a current carrying connection across all circuit connections by scrolling the display up and down The bottom right of the power flow display indicates that the controller is in RUN mode See Power Flow Display with Zoom Function on page 3 11 IMPORTANT The power flow display will not show signal fluctuations in the millisecond range This is due to the inherent delay factor of LCD displays Function Block Editor The Pico GFX 70 has the FUNCTION RELAYS menu for editing the function blocks without circuit diagrams The function blocks are an inherent component of the program L 001 B 7898 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 29 Calling the Function Blocks via the FUNCTION RELAYS Menu Figure 4 15 Explanation of the f unction block display Function special function parameter display Displays the function Tj Hn EE EEE GEE OE blocks used EHE il HEN Current 7L 001 B H cursor line r Free memory in bytes Display of the Function Blocks for Editing Figure 4 16 Function block display during editing Function block number Function block name Function block inputs Function block outputs Editing Function Blocks Unit special function Function Parameter display appears does not appear
269. program Without an operator entry this screen element functions like the numerical value screen element and therefore displays the value of the associated set variable When you start to enter a value on the Pico GFX 70 device the entry field shows the last variable value You start the entry by pressing OK This activates Selection mode in which you can use the cursor buttons to move between the value entry elements of a screen The order of the selected elements is from the back to the front This order is defined by their positioning and can be altered in the toolbar Pressing OK once more activates Entry mode Value and Scaling Range The value range defines the range that is to be displayed If the values are below or above this range the Pico GFX 70 activates an underflow or overflow signal Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 26 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The scaling range is used for scaling the value range The lower and upper values of the scaling range are assigned to the lower and upper values of the value range respectively The Pico GFX 70 displays the value range if a scaling range has not been defined Examples In order for example to display the value range 0 to 255 of a counter as a percentage 0 to 100 enter 0 as the minimum value and 255 as the maximum value in the Value range field Enter as the unit of measure Activate the Sc
270. r baud rate setting The number of stations is recognized by every station via a sign of life signal IMPORTANT The following applies to fast message transfer e Set the fastest possible baud rate to suit the network length and cable cross section e Fewer messages means faster messages e Avoid program downloads during the RUN mode Signs of Life of the Individual Stations and Diagnostics The inputs and outputs message type is used as a sign of life recognition to ensure that the state of a station can be recognized by other stations The states of the inputs and outputs are sent cyclically and at the set baud rate irrespective of the SEND IO setting If the inputs and outputs of a station are not recognized by other stations after a time determined by the baud rate the station is deemed to be disconnected until the next sign of life is recognized Pico Link a nd Point to Point Serial Connections 6 13 Evaluation occurs at the following intervals Baud rate Stations must send a sign of Stations recognize the absence life every of a sign of life signal after KB ms ms 1000 60 180 500 60 180 250 120 360 125 240 720 50 600 1800 20 1500 4500 10 3000 9000 If the absence of a sign of life is detected the respective diagnostics contact is set to 1 Diagnostics contact Sta ID 01 1 tion number ID 02 ID 03 ID 04
271. r the Counter Relay 20 gt SH gt SL 7 C 20 Counter relay function block number 20 gt sv ov gt Appears in the parameter display gt SH Upper set point gt SL Lower set point gt sv Defined actual value Preset Qv gt Actual value in RUN mode In the parameter display of a counter relay you change set point values and or the preset value and the enabling of the parameter display Value Range The function block operates in the integer range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Behavior when value range is exceeded The function block sets the switching contact C CY to the status 1 and retains the value of the last valid operation IMPORTANT The counter C counts every rising edge on the counter input If the value range is exceeded the switching contact C CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge detected Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 70 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Inputs The function block inputs gt sx gt su and gt sv can have the following operands e Constants e Markers MD MW MB e Analog inputs IA01 to IA04 JA01 terminal I7 IA02 terminal I8 IA03 terminal 111 A04 terminal 112 e Analog output QA01 e Actual value QV gt of another function block Actual Value OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Displaying the Parameter Set in the
272. ram e all the visualization data of the screens e all parameter settings of the circuit diagram the system settings debounce setting P buttons password retention on off and range Pico Link configuration setting for automatic startup in Terminal mode Serial Interface settings DST settings Memory module mode Insert the memory module in the open interface slot Figure 8 10 Installing and removing the memory module j A Sey IMPORTANT With Pico GFX 70 you can insert and remove the memory module even if the power supply is switched on without the risk of losing data PROGRAM DELETE PROG CARD DEVICE CARD CARD DEVICE DELETE CARD REPLACE Inside Pico GFX 70 8 13 Loading or Saving Circuit Diagrams You can only transfer circuit diagrams in STOP mode The Pico GFX 70 versions without a keypad and display automatically transfer the circuit diagram from the inserted memory module to the GFX processor when the power supply is switched on If the memory module contains an invalid circuit diagram Pico GFX 70 will keep the circuit diagram still present on the device IMPORTANT If you are using a display without a keypad load the programs with the PicoSoft Pro software The function for 4 automatically loading from the memory module on power up is only supported on GFX processor without display and keypad Swi
273. range gt 12 mw40 Number of bytes gt No 12 Te The transfer is in byte format 12 bytes are to be copied The range MD60 to MD62 is 12 bytes This is copied to the range MW40 to M W45 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 63 Comparisonrange Value of marker range 1 Comparison range 2 Value of marker range 2 1 decimal binary decimal binary MD60 866 143319 00110011 10100000 MW40 LSW 19543 00110011 10100000 0100110001010111 0100110001010111 MD60 866 143319 0011001110100000 MW41 MSW 13216 0011 0011 10100000 0100110001010111 0100110001010111 MD61 173304 101 0000 101001010100 MW42 LSW 26917 0000101001010100 0110100100100101 0110100100100101 MD61 173304101 0000101001010100 MB43 MSW 2644 0000 101001010100 01101001 00100101 01101001 00100101 MD62 982644 150 0011 10101001 0001 MB44 LSW 62902 0011 101010010001 11110101 10110110 11110101 10110110 MD62 982644 150 0011 101010010001 MB45 MSW 14993 0011 101010010001 11110101 10110110 11110101 10110110 After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BTO1T_ the values are copied to the appropriate range Example Copying of marker bytes destination range violation error The value of marker bytes MB81 to MB96 is to be transferred to MD93 MD94 MD95 and MD96 The length is 16 bytes Parameters of BT01 function block Source range gt I1 MB81 Destination range gt 12 MD93 Number of bytes gt No 18 IM
274. rcuit diagram display is on screen Use PicoSoft Pro to transfer circuit diagrams from your PC to Pico GFX 70 and vice versa Switch Pico GFX 70 to RUN mode from the PC to test the program using the current wiring PicoSoft Pro provides extensive help on how to use the software 1 Start PicoSoft Pro and click on Help The on line help provides all additional information about PicoSoft Pro that you will need If there are transmission problems Pico GFX 70 will display the ue reg R INVALID PROG message 2 Check if the circuit diagram uses functions which the Pico GFX 70 unit does not recognize IMPORTANT If the operating voltage fails during communication with the PC repeat the last procedure It is possible that not all the data was transferred between the PC and Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 16 Inside Pico GFX 70 Figure 8 11 Installing and removing 1760 CBL PC02 3 After transmission remove the cable and close the cover Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Inside Pico GFX 70 8 17 Device Version Every Pico GFX 70 has the device Series letter and Revision letter printed on the rear of the device housing The device version provides useful service information about the hardware version and the version of the operating system Example This processor is Series A Revision A L NN 100 240V ac Ser A Rev A
275. rd voltages of 100V ac to 240V ac are shown on page A 1 The Pico GFX 70 devices run a system test for one second after the power supply has been switched on Hither RUN ot STOP mode will be activated after this time depending on the default setting 1760 IA12XOW6l Expansion Units Figure 2 17 Power supply on the AC expansion units fe QQ 9 SOSS E E R1 T R2 L N N 100 240 V ATTENTION A short current surge will be produced when switching on for the first time Do not switch on the module via Reed contacts since these may burn or melt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 18 Installation Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 DC Power Supply for the GFX 70 Figure 2 18 Power supply on the GFX LO1 LO2 L01 alia ooo 24V OV OV The GFX processor unit supplies the necessary power supply to itself the display the input output electronics the expansion I O and optionally the Pico Link cable Tana The GFX device processor unit is protected against reverse polarity Ensure the correct polarity of the terminals to ensure that the GFX functions correctly Installation 2 19 1760 IB12XOB8 Expansion Module Figure 2 19 Power supply on the DC expansion units LO1 LO1 Fi l QO _ O SOSS E E R1 ss R12 24V OV OV 24V Nee IMPORTANT The module is protected against polarity reversal To ensure
276. reen 4 Screen 4 shows four static texts arranged in rows Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 9 Bit Display The bit display screen element has an input that can be associated with a Boolean variable The signal status of this variable changes the bit display screen element from a full screen to a frame in the Pico GFX 70 display Programming in PicoSoft Pro 1 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the Bit display screen element onto the screen 2 Place the mouse over the element hold down the left mouse button and position it as required The height and width of the element frame is variable and can be adjusted accordingly by enlarging or reducing the element frame vertically horizontally or diagonally This is done by dragging a selection handle of the element frame with the left mouse button held down Associated variable tab defines the Boolean variable for activating the bit display Visibility tab option for making the element invisible by means of an associated variable TIP The bit display is always output as a solid image The invisible function is the only option available If there is an overlap of elements the bit display that was inserted first is positioned at the back and the last one at the front This can be modified for the activated screen element in the toolbar Move to foreground background buttons IMPORTANT Large bit displays require a large amount of processor capacity and should be avoide
277. relay operates with the retentively saved actual value Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 83 Function of the High Speed Counter Function Block Figure 4 34 Signal diagram of the high speed counter function block 1 U N ee UUL PULL e PULL 1 counter input I1 to 14 2 upper setpoint value gt SH 3 preset actual value gt SV 4 lower setpoint value gt SL 5 enable of the counter CH EN 6 counting direction coil CH D 7 accept preset actual value coil CH SE 8 reset coil CH RE Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 84 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 9 contact make contact CH OF upper setpoint value reached exceeded 10 contact make contact CH FB lower setpoint value reached undershot 11 contact make contact CH ZE actual value equal to zero 12 out of value range e Range A The counter has the value zero The contacts CH ZE actual value equal to zero and CH FB lower setpoint value undershot are active The counter receives counter values and increases the actual value CH ZE drops out as well as CH FB after the lower setpoint value is reached e Range B The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper setpoint value The contact upper setpoint value CH OF becomes active e Range C The coil CH SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the preset actual value The contacts go to the resp
278. required by dragging the selection handle on the sides Associated variable tab On the Associated variable tab you define the Boolean variable for activating the numerical value Number range format tab The Number range format tab is used for defining the following e Value range e Unit of measure e Scaling range e Display change e Showing a signed value Visibility tab The Visibility tab enables you to make the screen element invisible by means of an associated variable Numerical Value Example The program consists of nine screens that can be selected via the up and down cursor buttons The screen change is defined in the Button editor see Button Editor on page 5 37 Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Numerical value_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 This screen shows six simple output formats of the numerical values and provides an overview of the Number range format properties The first screen shows six numerical values These are associated with the on delayed timing relay T04 Associated variable tab for which a time range of 4 seconds is set The actual value of the timing relay is provided at its QV output FB parameter which is then displayed in the appropriate number format The variable type of the associated variable is DWord Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 21 Table 5 14 Numerical value and output formats Left column Numerical value 1 e Value range 0 to 50000
279. revious value In both cases you return to Selection mode and can exit by pressing ESC Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 28 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Act va 99 Switch val Q1 OK 100 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The circuit diagram contains timing relay T01 which triggers counter C02 When the counter reaches the upper switch threshold SH it switches output Q1 to 1 The value of the counter s function block output QV is transferred to marker word MW06 The upper setpoint SH is associated with marker word MW 07 and the preset actual value SV with marker word MW05 In RUN mode the marker words are where the actual data is stored and where new data is written via the value entry elements The counter can be reset at any time via input I2 I1 rising edge is used to accept the value in marker word MW05 as a new preset actual value SV As there is no setpoint value in marker word MW07 switch value for Q1 when the program is started this is interpreted as switch value zero and output Q1 is switched immediately to 1 Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Value entry_manual screen change e60 Screen 1 Screen 1 illustrates the value entry option using the set variable marker word MW07 switch value for Q1 The value entry element is enlarged on the display A value range from 0 to 9999 and Allow digit selection as input format are defined in the Nu
280. rface Cable Installation Instructions 1760 INO07A MU P In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state programmable Application Considerations for SGI 1 1 controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Solid State Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A complete listing of current documentation including ordering Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 instructions Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation AG 7 1 Glossary Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Intended Use Chapter 1 Overview The Pico GFX 70 is a programmable device that provides HMI switching closed loop and open loop control functions and can be used to replace relay and contactor controls All components must be properly installed before use The display and keypad of the are protected to IP65 and do not normally require any special housing protection The rear components are designed as mounting units and must be installed in an enclosure control cabinet or a
281. rk stations Pico Link socket 2e to Pico Link socket 1L 2 The first station 1 socket 1L and the last station socket 2e must be provided with a network termination resistor a 3 Connect all stations to the power supply Figure 3 10 Example topology with two Pico Link stations 1 m Resistor Location 1 Ej Station 1 Do anaa Terminating a R1 12 Location 2 GFX 70 Resistor Station 2 51 58 1 Switch on the power supply on all stations 2 Ensure that all stations have a power supply The POW LED must light up or flash It is only possible to configure the stations which are supplied with voltage Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Commissioning 3 15 3 Proceed to the first physical station Location 1 This station has the termination resistor inserted on socket 1 IMPORTANT The following tasks are only possible in STOP mode Entering the Network Station Number 1 Simultaneously press the DEL and ALT buttons while the GFX displays the Status display The System menu appears SECURITY SYSTEM MENU LANGUAGE 2 Select the CONFIGURATOR menu option CONFIGURATOR 3 Press the OK button aig The NET menu appears COM ae 4 Press the OK button The NET PARAMETERS menu appears NET PARAMETERS STATIONS CONFIGURE 5 Press the OK button a R 6 Press t
282. rocessor Terminal Operation 1760 LDF 1760 RM GFX Mounting and Removal Flush Mounting Figure 2 50 Flush Mounting Display and Remote Processor Ip lt P M 12 2Nm 1 N 10 6 17 7 Ib in 1 Insert the display unit through the mounting holes on the panel Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 42 Installation 2 Attach the fixing rings 3 Attach the processor unit Removal Procedure Figure 2 51 Removing the Remote Processor 1760 RM 1 Insert the screwdriver into the mounting slide 2 Push screwdriver to the right to open the slide 3 Remove the processor unit from the display unit 4 Loosen the fixing rings 5 Remove the display unit from the panel Making Connections Connecting the Power Supply Figure 2 52 Remote Processor Power Supply Connection 1760 RM LO1 L02 101 gt 1A A Ue 24 V dc 20 4 28 8 V Hde le 150mA 00 06x 35x 100 o 24V OV este sey Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Installation 2 43 Connecting the Serial Cable 1760 RM cable Cable Wire Color Code 00000000 X5 green gt X4 white X3 yellow amp 5 00000000 X2 _ brown X1 gray 1 Remove the interface cover
283. rst IEC EN 61000 4 4 severity level 3 Power cables 2 kV Signal cables 2 kV High energy pulses Surge IEC EN 61000 4 5 severity level 2 power cable symmetrical 0 5 kV Line conducted interference IEC EN 61000 4 6 Overvoltage category Pollution degree Dielectric strength Measurement of the air clearance and creepage distance EN 50178 UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 142 Dielectric strength EN 50178 Tools and cable cross sections Solid 0 2 mm 24 AWG minimum to 4 mm 12 AWG maximum Flexible with ferrule 0 2 mm 24 AWG minimum to 2 5 mm2 12 AWG maximum Slot head screwdriver width 3 5 mm x 0 5 mm 0 14 in x 0 02 in Table A 7 Display keypad Specifications Specification Power supply Specifications A 7 1760 DU and 1760 DUB Power supplied by the processor unit LCD display Type Graphic monochrome Visible area W x H 62 mm x 33 mm Size of pixels 0 4mm x 0 4mm Number of pixels W x H 132 x 64 Spacing pixel centre to pixel centre 0 42 mm LCD backlight Backlight color Yellow green The backlight can be used and programmed Yes in visualization applications LEDs The backlight can be used and programmed 2 in visualization applications Operating buttons Number 9 Can be used and programmed in 9 visualization applications Mechanical lifespan 1 x 10 actuations typical
284. s corresponds to a 10 bit resolution At the output this corresponds to a physical voltage between 0Vand 10V de Negative values such as 512 are evaluated as zero and output as OV de Positive values greater than 1023 such as 2047 are evaluated as 1023 and output as 10V dc You can either use the Pico GFX 70 interface to save programs to a memory module or use PicoSoft Pro and a transmission cable to transfer them to a PC GFX without Display and Keypad Pico GFX 70 models without buttons and a display can be loaded with the Pico GFX 70 program via PicoSoft Pro or automatically from the fitted memory module every time the power supply is switched on Interface The Pico GFX 70 interface is covered Remove the cover carefully Inside Pico GFX 70 8 11 Figure 8 9 Remove cover and plug in To close the slot again push the cover back onto the slot Memory Module The module is available as accessory 1760 MM3 for Pico GFX 70 Circuit diagrams containing all the relevant data can be transferred from the 1760 MM3 memory module to Pico GFX 70 Each memory module can hold one GFX program Information stored on the memory module is non volatile and thus you can use the memory module to archive transfer and copy your circuit diagram Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 12 Inside Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 On the memory module you can save e the prog
285. s 1024 This value is too big The value at gt no can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the comparison ranges is outside of the permissible range is output BCO01E3 is 1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 54 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 BTO7 INI Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Data Block Transfer Pico GFX 70 is provided with 32 function blocks BTO1 to BT32 for transferring values from one marker range Copy data The marker ranges can be overwritten with a particular value data initial is at ion The following marker types can be transferred and overwritten e MB e MWY e MD The function block is enabled in the circuit diagram Figure 4 28 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with enabling of transfer data block function block T BTO7T_ BTO7E1 BTO7E2 BT07E3 M 42 Parameter display and parameter set for a data block transfer function block BT07 Data block transfer function block number 07 INI INI mode initialize marker ranges Appears in the parameter display gt I1 Source range start gt I2 Destination range start gt NO Number of elements to be written in bytes per range Value range 1 to 383 Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of a function block Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 55 Operating Modes of the Transfer Data Block Function Block Parameter Fun
286. s 8 4 Deleting 3 8 Entering 3 8 Relay coils 4 34 Rules 4 34 Rockwell Automation Support www rockwellautomation com Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At http support rockwellautomation com you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http support rockwellautomation com Installation Assistance If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information that s contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running United States 1 440 646 3223 Monday Friday 8am 5pm EST Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any States technical support issues New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning an
287. s the OK button 10 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change the value in 25 steps 11 Set the required backlighting TMG The backlight will immediately change to the set value 0 25 50 75 and 100 are possible values IMPORTANT Pico GFX 70 comes with the following factory setting The contrast is set to 0 The backlight is set to 75 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 22 Pico GFX 70 Settings Retention Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 It is a requirement of system and machine controllers for operating states or actual values to have retentive settings What this means is that the values will be retained safely even after the supply voltage to a machine or system has been switched off and are also retained until the next time the actual value is overwritten The following operands and function blocks can be set to operate retentively e Markers e Counter function blocks e Data function blocks and e Timing relays Operating hours counter The device provides four retentive operating hours counters They are always retentive and can only be selectively deleted with a reset command Retentive data volume 200 bytes is the maximum memory range for retentive data operating hours counters are not included Markers A uset definable and consistent marker range can be declared as retentive Counters All C CH and CI function blocks can be operated with retentive actual
288. scans the remote station The entire READ marker range is transferred as a string The entire WRITE marker range is transferred as a string IMPORTANT Data consistency The data is located in the image range data range storing the marker states of the active station 1MD as well as in the image range of the remote station MD Each station writes data to its own image range asynchronously for data communication As the serial interface transfers large data volumes slower than the devices overwrite the image ranges the following applies one marker double word 1MD MD is consistent Within a program cycle a marker double word that is ovetwrtitten via Serial Interface is not constant The data via the Serial Interface is written to the status image over the course of the program cycle This means that a different marker value can be present at the start of the program cycle to after the write operation via Serial Interface Sign of life detection Serial Interface diagnostics contact ID09 To determine the proper functioning of the Serial Interface connection the diagnostics contact ID09 is provided on the active station of the Serial Interface connection Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections 6 21 Status of the connection Status of diagnostics contact ID09 g Serial Interface connection operating correctly or no Serial Interface connection selected Serial Interface connection
289. service distribution board Both the power feed and the signal terminals must be laid and covered so as to prevent accidental contact The installation must comply with regulations for electromagnetic compatibility EMC Power up must not cause any hazards arising from activated devices such as unexpected motor startups or power ups Improper Use Pico GFX 70 should not be used as a substitute for safety related controls such as burner or crane controls emergency stop or two hand safety controls Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 2 Overview Product Description Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The Pico GFX 70 is an electronic HMI unit and control relay with the following features e Logic functions e Timing relay and counter functions e Time switch functions e Arithmetic functions e PID controllers Operator and display functions The Pico GFX 70 is a display HMI control and input device in one It allows you to create solutions for domestic applications as well as tasks in machine and plant construction It is a modular and flexible device The Pico Link enables the connection of up to eight stations to form a single control system Each station can contain a program This allows the design of systems using high speed controllers with decentralized intelligence In Terminal mode the Pico GFX 70 can be used to control any device in the network and display data from it In this mode the Pico
290. sing the up down arrow keys 7 Press OK to access the Entry modes Select a position from to using the left right arrow keys Set a value using the left right arrow keys 8 Save the input from to with OK Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 24 Pico GFX 70 Settings 9 Press ESC to exit the input for the retentive ranges CI 00 gt CI 00 A DB 00m7 2DB 00 Up to six different ranges can be selected B 200 m The display on the lower right B 200 indicates the number of free bytes Example MB 01 gt MB 04 MB 01 to MB 04 C 12 to C 16 DB 01 to DB 16 T 26 to T 32 should be C 12 gt C 16 retentive CH 00 gt CH 00 CI 00 gt CI 00 DB 01 gt DB 16 124 bytes have been assigned to the retentive data range 76 bytes are still available B 076 Deleting Ranges Set the ranges to be erased to the values from 00 to 00 e g MB 00 gt mB 00 The markers are no longer retentive Deleting Retentive Actual Values of Markers and Function Blocks The retentive actual values are cleared if the following is fulfilled applies only in STOP mode e When the circuit diagram is transferred from PicoSoft Pro PC or from the memory module to Pico GFX 70 the retentive actual values are reset to 0 This also applies when there is no program on the memory module In this case the old circuit diagram is retained in Pico GFX 70 e When changing the respective retentive ran
291. sis Switching hysteresis for value 12 Value HY applies to positive and negative hysteresis 11 Input 1 1st input word 2 Input 2 2nd input word KP Standard Proportional gain ME Minimum make time Minimum make time MV manual value Manual manipulated variable NO numbers of elements Number of elements OS Offset Offset for the value 11 PD Period duration Period duration SH Setpoint high Upper limit value SL Setpoint low Lower limit value SV Set value Defined actual value Preset TC Scan time TG Recovery time TN Standard Rate time TV Standard Reset time X1 X1 interpolation point 1 abscissa Lower value of source range X2 Interpolation point 2 abscissa Upper value of source range y1 Interpolation point 1 ordinate Lower value of target range Y2 Interpolation point 2 ordinate Upper value of target range Table A 22 Function Block Output Operands Meaning of abbreviation Input QV Output value Description Output value Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 20 Specifications Table A 23 Other Operands Other operands Description MB Marker byte 8 bit value IA Analog input if available on device MW Marker word 16 bit value QA Analog output if available on device MD Marker double word 32 bit value NU Constant number value range from 2 147 483648 to 2 147 483647 Memory Requirement The following table provides an overview of the memory requirement of t
292. socket 1 in the first station is for the bus terminating resistor For other stations socket 1 is used for plugging in the incoming cable Socket 2 is used for the outgoing cable or for the bus termination resistor on the last physical station in the network Installation 2 37 Figure 2 44 Bus termination resistors Terminating Resistor First Station on the Pico Link Location 1 f GFX 70 Station 1 1 8 i IL Location 2 R GFX70 Station 2 l Location 3 GFX 70 Station 3 e o Location 8 ia Terminating Last Station on the Pico Link GFX 70 Station 8 Resistor Both RJ45 interfaces are visible after the cover plate has been removed When a cable is plugged in the mechanical connection must be audible click and visible Before a plug or cable is removed the mechanical locking feature must be undone Figure 2 45 Plugging and unplugging cables Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 38 Installation Connecting the Serial Interface Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The GFX processor unit is provided with a multi function interface This can be used to set up point to point communication between different devices The interface is also used for connecting PicoSo
293. ssage Text Example Program 4 Activating Message Texts with a Default Text The program consists of two screens containing message texts The screens are activated automatically in succession in the display This program is an extension of the program Two messages in screen_automatic screen change e60 The extension consists of the display of a default text in screen 2 when the counter takes on values that are not assigned to any messages The circuit diagram uses six on delayed timing relays TO1 to T06 that activate outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 in succession after an elapsed time This operation is run in a continuous loop since timing relay T06 resets all timing relays after a set time Counter make contacts CO1ZE in the circuit diagram are switched directly before outputs Q1 to Q4 and LE03 so that the outputs are only active if screen 1 is active when counter C01 has the value 0 The screen activation is executed via counter C01 This has the value 4 as the upper setpoint SH This therefore generates the counter values 0 1 2 3 and 4 The counter is activated with every reset of timing relays T01 to T06 The counter value 0 activates screen 1 and counter value 1 screen 2 Screen 2 remains activated when the counter value is 2 3 or 4 and counter value 2 and 3 cause the default text to be displayed as there are no message text assigned to these values The counter value 4 causes the message text RESTART to be displayed in screen 2 If the counter
294. ssible function block number 01 to 32 Appears in the parameter display OV gt Actual value from the network Output The function block output ev gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 Contacts GT01Q1 to GT32Q1 Contact make contact GT Q1 switches to status 1 if a new value transferred on the Pico Link network is present Memory Requirement of the GET Function Block The GET function block requires 28 bytes of memory GET Diagnostics The GET function block only functions when the Pico Link network is functioning correctly see Signs of Life of the Individual Stations and Diagnostics on page 6 12 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 106 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Function of the GET Function Block Figure 4 44 Signal diagram of the GET function block 2 1 GT 01 2 value on GT QV gt IMPORTANT The GET function blocks are assigned the value 0 when the power supply is switched on Seven Day Time Switch Pico GFX 70 is equipped with a real time clock which you can use in the circuit diagram as a 7 day time switch and a year time switch IMPORTANT The procedure for setting the time is described under Serting Date Time and Daylight Savings Time on page 7 11 Pico GFX 70 provides 32 seven day time switches HW01 to HW32 for a total of 128 switching times Each time switch has four channels which
295. ssign a screen change button element to an operator button in each of these screens Password Logout The Screen overview contains the Passwords tab for defining a logout time This logout time is skipped with the Password logout function Set Variable to Fixed Value This function assigns a fixed value to the selected variable such as for resetting to a defined value Increment Variable The variable value is increased by the set step width Decrement Variable The variable value is decreased by the set step width Changeover Relay The state of a variable or a function block input is negated Introduction to Pico Link Chapter 6 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections All Pico GFX 70 units have Pico Link terminals The Pico Link is designed for eight stations Using the Pico Link you can e Process additional inputs and outputs e Implement faster and improved control using decentralized programs e Synchronize date and time Read and write inputs and outputs e Send values to other stations e Receive values from other stations e Load programs from or to any station The Pico Link is based on the CAN network Controller Area Network CAN is specified by the ISO 11898 standard CAN has the following in built features e Message oriented transmission protocol e Multimaster bus access capabilities with non destructive bit wise bus arbitration via priority messaging Arbitration An instanc
296. ssociated variable I2 is defined for switching visibility break contact bit logic When I2 is actuated the bitmap is inverted as shown below Screen 7 Screen 7 contains two bitmaps Background covered is selected in the Display tab for both bitmaps However as the right bitmap covers the left one the right bitmap is displayed completely Screen 8 Screen 8 contains two bitmaps The right one covers the left one Both bitmaps are displayed fully since the background of the right bitmap is set for transparent in the Display tab Bitmap Example Program 2 Bitmap Display with Automatic Screen Change The program is a copy of the program Bitmap_manual screen change e60 with the difference that the individual screens are displayed automatically in succession The circuit diagram contains a pulse generator T01 that triggers the output Q3 display clock signal and the counter C01 This operation is run in a continuous loop as the counter activates timing relay T02 when its upper limit value SH is reached This resets counter C01 after a set time The counter values activate the corresponding individual screens Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program overlaid bitmaps_manual screen change e60 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 18 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Bitmap Example Program 3 Overlaying Bitmaps The program consists of three screens that
297. swords tab enables you to define up to three passwords and assign a logout time with each one for closing the screen Languages Tab The Languages tab is used for entering different languages that are to be used You can then define text in these languages for all the text elements of the visualization program However only one download language can be defined for downloading to the device This is also defined here and can be modified quickly when the devices are commissioned You can export import the languages to from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet enabling text to be sent off in this way for external translation Screen Activation Tab The Screen activation tab allows you to define associated variables for activating the screen The variables available depend on the variable type concerned You can use markers Byte Word DWord analog inputs and outputs word or function block inputs outputs DWord as associated variables In the List of activation values you define whether the screen is to be activated by the associated variable and the value at which this is done If the Force screen change check box is activated the Pico GFX 70 will immediately abort every job started and activate this screen when the value of the associated variable triggers it This could mean for example that value entries macros for processing functions after pressing an operator button and also password entries are aborted This can be useful for outputtin
298. t see Monitoring of Short Circuit and Overload with 1760 IB12XOB8 on page 8 7 The outputs are processed as relay coils or contacts like the outputs in the basic unit The output relays are S1 to S8 1760 IA12XOWOI provides the outputs 1 to S6 The other outputs S7 S8 can be used internally IMPORTANT How is an Expansion Unit Recognized If at least one R contact or S coil contact is used in the circuit diagram the basic unit assumes that an expansion unit is connected Inside Pico GFX 70 8 9 Transfer Behavior The input and output data of the expansion units is transferred serially in both directions Take into account the modified reaction times of the inputs and outputs of the expansion units Input and Output Reaction Times of Expansion Units The debounce setting has no effect on the expansion unit Transfer times for input and output signals e Local expansion Time for inputs R1 to R12 30 ms 1 cycle Time for outputs S1 to S6 S8 15 ms 1 cycle e Decentralized expansion Time for inputs R1 to R12 80 ms 1 cycle Time for outputs S1 to S6 S8 40 ms 1 cycle Function Monitoring of Expansion Units If the power supply of the expansion unit is not present no connection can be established between it and the basic unit The expansion inputs R1 to R12 R15 R16 are incorrectly processed in the basic unit and show status 0 It cannot be assured that the outputs S1 to S8 are transferred
299. t data of a function block is updated immediately after processing Pico GFX 70 processes the function blocks according to the function block list see Calling the Function Blocks via the FUNCTION RELAYS Menu on page 4 29 from top to bottom You can sort the function block list with PicoSoft Pro You can then for example use the results consecutively establish contact to the outside world The output relays Q 01 to Q S are switched and the inputs 11 to I R are read once mote e Pico GFX 70 also copies all the new switching states to the status image register exchange all data on the Pico Link network read and write Pico GFX 70 only uses this status image for one cycle This ensures that each circuit connection is evaluated with the same switching states for one cycle even if the input signals I1 to 112 change their status several times within a cycle IMPORTANT The following must be observed when operating a PID controller function block The cycle time of the program must be less than the scan time of the controller If the cycle time is greater than the controller scan time the controller will not be able to achieve constant results Serial Interface Data Access During the Program Cycle The data exchange with the point to point connection can be carried out in any segment of the program cycle This data exchange increases the cycle time with both active and remote stations Only use data that is absolu
300. t sH 4 preset actual value gt sv 5 lower setpoint value gt sL 6 counter enable Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 90 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 7 accept preset actual value coil Cl EN 8 reset coil Cl RE 9 contact make contact Cl OF upper setpoint value reached exceeded 10 contact make contact Cl FB lower setpoint value reached undershot 11 contact make contact CI ZE actual value equal to zero 12 contact make contact Cl CY value range exceeded or undershot e Range A The counter counts upwards The value leaves the lower threshold value and reaches the upper value e Range B The count direction changes to a downward count The contacts switch in accordance with the actual value e Range C The enable signal is set to 0 The actual value becomes 0 e Range D The rising edge on the accept preset value coil sets the actual value to the preset value e Range E The reset pulse sets the actual value to zero e Range F The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter The contacts become active according to the direction of the values positive or negative Comparators Comparator function blocks allow you to compare constants and variables with one another The following comparisons are possible Function block input Function block input gt l1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Gr
301. t time elapses normally e Range B The entered setpoint does not elapse normally because the trigger coil drops out prematurely e Range C The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 145 Figure 4 67 Signal diagram of timing relay on delayed with and without random switching e Range D The Stop coil is inoperative after the time has elapsed e Range E The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact e Range F The Reset coil resets the time during the timeout sequence After the Reset coil drops out the time elapses normally Timing relay off delayed with and without random switching Random switching with and without retriggering The contact of the timing relay randomly switches within the set value range Retriggering When the time is running and the trigger coil is reactivated or deactivated the actual value is reset to zero The set time of the timing relay is timed out once more Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 146 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Figure 4 68 Signal diagram of timing relay off delayed with without random switching with without retriggering a 1 trigger coil T E 2 stop coil T ST 3 reset coil T RE 4 switching contact make contact T Q1 t setpoint time e Range A The time elapses after the trigger coil is deactivated
302. t values and counter Setpoint without having to call up the circuit diagram This is possible regardless of whether Pico GFX 70 is running a program or is in STOP mode 1 Press OK to switch to the main menu 2 Start the parameter display by selecting PARAMETERS All function blocks are displayed as a list The following preconditions must be fulfilled in order for a parameter set to be displayed e A function relay must have been included in the circuit diagram e The PARAMETERS menu must be available e The parameter set must have been enabled for access indicated by the character at the bottom right of the display IMPORTANT Parameter sets can only be enabled or protected via the FUNCTION RELAYS menu or via the circuit diagram with the enable and with inhibit parameter set charactets Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 10 Pico GFX 70 Settings 3 Select the required function block using the up down arrow keys T 03 yy S eet a 4 Press the OK button gt I3 005 000 eee Ete 5 Scroll through the constants of the function block inputs 6 Change the values for a parameter set With OK in the Entry mode Left right arrows to change decimal place Up down arrows to change the value of a decimal place OK save constants or ESC retain previous setting 7 Press ESC to leave the parameter display IMPORTANT Only constants on the function block inpu
303. tal encoder The incremental encoder evaluates the rising and falling edges This ensures that the pulse count is not affected by oscillation of a signal edge If the number of pulses are required divide the value by two Wiring of a Counter The following assignment of the digital inputs apply e I1 counter input for the counter C101 channel A e 2 counter input for the counter C101 channel B e 3 counter input for the counter C102 channel A e 14 counter input for the counter C102 channel B Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 86 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Tatra T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CK CH CI counters only once You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter relay has different coils and contacts Figure 4 35 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with high speed incremental encoder counter I e a CIO1EN E06a Hcesseq eecsssasetecssa CIO1RE N aa CI01SE CI010F LQ 01 CIO1FB L Q 02 CI01ZE L Q 03 CI01cY sm 94 Parameter display and parameter set for high speed incremental encoder counter C101 High speed incremental encoder counter function block number 01 Appears in the parameter display gt
304. tations accept the date and time of the sending station The function block name is SCO1 send clock Figure 4 59 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with SC function block HW01QW1 scoit Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 136 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Parameter Display and Parameter Set for the SC Function Block The SCO1 function block has no parameters as it is a triggered system service Coil SCOIT trigger coil Memory Requirement of the SC Function Block The SC function block requires 20 bytes of memory SC Diagnostics The SC function block only functions when the Pico Link network is functioning correctly see Signs of Life of the Individual Stations and Diagnostics on page 6 12 Function of the Date Time Function Block If the trigger coil of the function block is activated the current date the day of the week and time from the sending station is automatically put onto the Pico Link network All other network stations must accept these values IMPORTANT The station that sends its date and time does this when the seconds value is zero Example The trigger pulse is actuated at 03 32 21 hh mm ss The other stations are synchronized at 03 33 00 This time is accessed by all other stations This process can be repeated as often as desired The trigger coil must be triggered again from the 0 to the 1 state Accuracy of Ti
305. tch to STOP mode Select PROGRAM from the main menu Select the CARD menu option The CARD menu option will only appear if you have inserted a functional memory module You can transfer a circuit diagram from Pico GFX 70 to the memory module and from the memory module to the Pico GFX 70 memory or delete the content of the memory module IMPORTANT If the operating voltage fails during communication with the memory module repeat the last procedure since Pico GFX 70 may not have transferred or deleted all the data After transmission remove the memory module and close the covet Saving a Circuit Diagram on the Memory Module 1 2 Select DEVICE CARD Confirm the prompt with OK to delete the contents of the memory module and replace it with the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram Press ESC to cancel Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 14 Inside Pico GFX 70 DEVICE CARD CARD DEVICE DELETE CARD INVALID PROG DELETE Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Loading a Circuit Diagram from the Memory Module 1 Select the CARD gt DEVICE menu option 2 Press OK to confirm the prompt if you want to delete the Pico GFX 70 memory and replace it with the memory module content 3 Press ESC to cancel If there are transmission problems Pico GFX 70 will display the INVALID PROG message This means that either the memory module is empty or that the circuit
306. tely necessary Loading Visualization Data When setting a program to RUN that contains visualization data the contents of the screens to be displayed have to be loaded This operation is repeated every 200 ms With large screens this can take up to one millisecond of cycle time The time required for loading in the event of a screen change depends on the size of the screens to be loaded During a screen change the new screen is loaded from the screen memory into the RAM The loading time can be calculated as follows screen size in byte multiplied by 80 us I 01 j I 02 Q 01 Q 01 Inside Pico GFX 70 8 3 Example screen size 250 bytes The loading time for the screen is 250 x 80 us 20 ms IMPORTANT If you require the GFX to have a small cycle time use several small screens so that the loading time is not too long during a screen change Only display necessary information in the screens concerned The loading of screen data and screen changes can be implemented in any segment of the program cycle Take this behavior into account when considering the reaction time of your entire control system Effects on the Creation of the Circuit Diagram Pico GFX 70 evaluates the circuit diagram in these six segments in succession You should take into account two factors when creating your circuit diagram e The changeover of a relay coil does not change the switching state of an associated contact unti
307. termining the capability of the device concerned This function is only available with devices featuring a display Exception Terminal mode with Pico GFX 70 The device enables the display of the following device information e AC or DC power supply e T transistor output or R relay output e C clock provided e A analog output provided e LCD display provided e Pico Link Pico Link provided e OS 1 10 204 operating system version Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 26 Pico GFX 70 Settings e CRC 25825 checksum of the operating system 1 Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GEX 70 on page 7 5 2 Select the SYSTEM menu SECURITY A SYSTEM s 3 Press the OK button MENU LANGUAGE CONFIGURATOR V 4 Use the down arrow button to select the INFORMATION menu and CARD MODE A press OK DISPLAY Breer ene This will display all device information INFORMATION V Example 1760 DUB 1760 LDFC 1760 IB12XOB4I0F DC TCA LCD NET os 1 111 111 CRC 63163 Example 1760 DUB 1760 LDF 1760 IB12XOW4IF DC RC LCD OS 1 11 111 Display in STOP mode CRC 63163 Display in RUN mode DC RC LCD OS 1 11 111 The CRC checksum is not displayed CRC 5 Press ESC to leave the display CARD MODE A DISPLAY RETENTION
308. tes invalid offset error The value of marker byte MB40 is to be transferred to MW54 and subsequent marker words The block length is specified by the value of the counter C 01QV Parameters of BCO1 function block Comparison range 1 gt 11 MB40 Comparison range 2 gt 12 MW54 Number of bytes gt No c orQv IMPORTANT The value of C 01QV is 788 This value is too big The value at gt no can be between 1 and 383 The message The specified offset of the destination range is outside of the permissible range is output BT01E3 is 1 CPY mode copy marker ranges There is one source range and one destination range The source range is specified at gt 11 The destination range is specified at gt 12 The length of the source and destination range is specified by the number of bytes at the gt No input The content of the source range is copied to the marker bytes in the destination range The function block executes the copy operation if there is a rising edge from 0 to 1 at the BT T_ Trigger coil The error outputs E1 E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless of the status of the trigger Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 61 Example Copy of marker blocks definition of marker ranges direct The content of marker bytes 10 to 19 is to be transferred to marker bytes 20 to 29 Parameters of BTO1 function block Source range gt I1 MB10 Destination range gt 12 MB20 Number of bytes gt No 10
309. the differential behavior when the setpoint is changed the change of the actual value the process variable is calculated and not the change in the control difference This is shown in the following equation Yp 0 Kp x T T x X 1 Xi Kp proportional gain T Scan time T Differential time of the control system also called the rate time X t Actual value with scan time t Xi t 1 Actual value with scan time t 1 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 101 Scan time Te Scan time T determines the duration of the interval in which the function block is called by the operating system for processing The value range is between 0 and 6553 5 s If the value 0 is set the cycle time of the device is the pause time between the function block calls TPE be device cycle time varies according to the length of the program With a scan time of 0 s this may cause an irregular control response IMPORTANT Use the Set cycle time function block see Set Cycle Time on page 4 137 to keep the cycle time of the device constant Manual Mode of the PID Controller A value must be present at the gt mv input to set the manipulated variable directly If the coil DC SE is activated the value at gt mv is transferred as manipulated variable v gt This value is present for as long as the DC SE coil is activated or the value at the gt mv input is changed If coil DC SE is deactivated the control algorithm is reactivated IMPORT
310. ther Inductive Loads To g5 15 ms R 48 Q L 0 24H Utilization factor g 0 25 Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency f 0 5 Hz Max duty factor DF 50 1500 switch operations per hour Inductive loading with external suppressor circuit for each load See Connecting Transistor Outputs on page 2 30 Utilization factor g 1 Relative duty factor 100 Max switching frequency Max duty factor Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Number of switch operations per hour depends on the suppressor circuit Table A 16 Analog Output Specifications Specification Number of analog outputs Specifications A 15 1760 IB12XOW4IOF 1760 IB12XOB410F 1 Electrical isolation To power supply No To the digital inputs No To the digital outputs Yes To the Pico Link network Yes Output type DC voltage Signal range 0 to 10V de Output current max 10 mA Load resistor 1k Q Short circuit and overload proof Yes Resolution analog 0 01V de Resolution digital 10 bit 0 to 1023 counts Transient recovery time 100 us Accuracy 25 C to 55 C related to the 2 range Accuracy 25 C related to the range 1 Conversion time Each processor cycle Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 A 16 Specifications Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Table A 17 Pico Link Specifications Specification Number of stations
311. ting plate mounting feet must be used that can be fixed to the back of the Pico GFX 70 The mounting feet are available as an accessory Installation 2 15 1760 NMF mounting feet IMPORTANT Three mounting feet are sufficient for a device with four fixing points Figure 2 14 Screw mounting for the GFX zs oe ld a Figure 2 15 Screw mounting for the 1760 IA12XOW6I and 1760 IB12X0B8 I Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 16 Installation E Connecting the Expansion Unit Terminals Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 You can only add one Pico expansion I O module to each controller Figure 2 16 Connecting expansion units Tool for Cage Clamp Terminals Slot head screwdriver width 3 5 mm x 0 6 mm Connection Cross Sections of the Cage Clamp Terminal Cables Solid 0 2 to 4 mm AWG 24 12 e Flexible with ferrule 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 24 12 Tool for Slot Head Screws for Expansion 1 0 Unit Slot head screwdriver width 3 5 x 0 6 mm tightening torque 0 6 Nm Connection Cross Sections of Screw Terminal Cables e Solid 0 2 to 4 mm AWG 22 12 e Flexible with ferrule 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG 22 12 Installation 2 17 Connecting the Power Supply TIP The required connection data for both device types GFX 1760 IB12XOB8 with 24V dc and 1760 IA12XOW6I with standa
312. to the expansion unit WARNING Continuously monitor the functionality of the Pico GFX 70 expansion to prevent switching errors in the machine or plant The status of the internal input 114 of the basic unit indicates the status of the expansion unit e 114 0 expansion unit is functional e 114 1 expansion unit is not functional Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 8 10 Inside Pico GFX 70 QA Analog Output Loading and Saving Programs Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Example Power can be applied to the expansion unit later than the basic unit This means that the basic unit is switched to RUN when the expansion unit is absent The following Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram detects if the expansion unit is functional or not functional Figure 8 8 Circuit diagram for expansion testing I4 M 01 08 sigarer on eta hese eLa ae SM ol r e Y AE ENS 08 I 01 I 02 I Q 01 Q 01 As long as I 14 is 1 the remaining circuit diagram is skipped If I 14 is 0 the circuit diagram is processed If the expansion unit drops out for any reason the circuit diagram is skipped M 01 detects whether the circuit diagram was processed for at least one cycle after the power supply is switched on If the circuit diagram is skipped all the outputs retain their previous state The analog output operates with decimal values between 0 and 1023 Thi
313. ts can be changed Adjustable Parameters for Function Blocks You can modify the function blocks used in the circuit diagram in three different ways e All circuit diagram parameters can be adjusted in STOP mode via the function block editor e Set point constants can be modified in RUN mode via the function block editor e Set points constants can be modified via the PARAMETERS menu Adjustable set point values are e The inputs with all function blocks if constants have been used e Switch on and off times with time switches In RUN mode Pico GFX 70 operates with a new set point as soon as it has been modified in the parameter display and saved with OK Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 11 Setting Date Time and Daylight Savings Time SET CLOCK DST SETTING HH MM 00 27 DD MM 05 05 YEAR 2002 The devices are equipped with a real time clock with date and time functions The time switch function block can be used to implement time switch applications If the clock has not yet been set or if Pico GFX 70 is switched on after the buffer time has elapsed the clock starts with the setting WE 1 00 01 05 2002 The Pico GFX 70 clock operates with date and time so the hour minute day month and year must all be set IMPORTANT The time such as 1 00 indicates the version of the device operating system 1 Select SET CLOCK from the main menu
314. u level Main menu System menu Date display Day Bussie ALT P t MO 11 50 Bo Sac DOE Eg 2e cB scones ws MO 01 04 2002 Q 34 STOP Pico GFX 70 Status Display Display operating Inputs I 12 mode Terminal mode Weekday Time Mo 02 00 Outputs 34 stop or Weekday Date RUN STOP BUSY mode On 1 2 3 4 0ff Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 1 10 Overview Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Status Display for Local Expansion Inputs Expansion Weekday Time Outputs Ricdiceesss cece 12 RS AC P MO 10 42 S 1 8 STOP On 1 2 3 4 Off AC expansion ok P buttons or Weekday Date RS Expansion functioning correctly Pico GFX 70 Advanced Status Display RE NT1 COM AC DC ST Retention Debounce RE Pico Link station I 12 6 89 12 I NT1 AC P MO 14 42 T Q 12345678 RUN Retention switched on Debounce switched on Pico Link station with station address The COM connection is active AC expansion functioning correctly DC expansion functioning correctly AC expansion ok P buttons Startup behavior When the power supply is switched on Pico GFX 70 switches to STOP mode Overview 1 11 Pico GFX 70 LED Display Pico GFX 70 features two LEDs on the back of the processor These indicate the status of the power supply POW an
315. ud average bus load 25 average operating time 2000 h year avetage error rate of 10 i e 1 message is faulty every 1000 transmission of 1 12 x 10 messages per year of which 1 12 x 107 messages are faulty residual error probability r lt 10 x 10 10 This means one of 101 messages is so corrupt that the fault cannot be recognized as such For a network this corresponds to a working time of approximately 1000 years Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 6 16 Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connections Introduction to the Serial Interface Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The Serial Interface is a point to point connection using the serial interface This interface connection allows the reading of input output states as well as the reading and writing of marker ranges This data can be used for set point entry or for display functions The stations of the Serial Interface have different functions The active station controls the entire interface connection The remote station responds to the requests of the active station The remote station cannot distinguish whether the Serial Interface is active or whether a PC with PicoSoft Pro is using the interface Topology The following topologies are possible Two devices GFX as active station and GFX as remote station Figure 6 5 Serial Interface connection to a another GFX a Pico Link and Point to Point Serial Connectio
316. ue OV gt The actual value QV gt can be assigned the following operands e Markers MD MW MB e Analog output QA01 IMPORTANT The actual value is only cleared in RUN mode with a specific reset signal Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts e CHO1O0F to CHO4OF Actual value 2 Upper set point e CHO1FB to CHO4FB Actual value lt Lower set point e CHO1ZE to CH04ZE Actual value Zero e CHOICY to CHO4CY Value range exceeded Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 82 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Coils e CHO1EN to CHO04EN enable of the counter e CH01D to CH04D count direction definition Status 0 count upwards Status 1 count downwards e CHOIRE to CHO4RE reset actual value to zero e CHOISE to CHO4SE accept preset actual value with rising edge Memory Requirement of the High Speed Counter The high speed counter function block requires 52 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs Retention High speed counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the SYSTEM gt RETENTION menu If a counter relay is retentive the actual value is retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as well as when the power supply is switched off If Pico GFX 70 is started in RUN mode the counter
317. utomatically deactivated when loading a circuit diagram from the memory module or via PicoSoft Pro to Pico GFX 70 or when deleting a circuit diagram in Pico GFX 70 The startup behavior is an important aid during the commissioning phase The circuit diagram which Pico GFX 70 contains is not as yet fully wired up or the system or machine is in a state which Pico GFX 70 is not permitted to control The outputs should not be controlled when Pico GFX 70 is switched on Setting the Startup Behavior MEA The GFX models without a display can only be started in RUN mode Requirement Pico GFX 70 must contain a valid circuit diagram 1 Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is protected by a password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GEX 70 on page 7 5 2 Specify the operating mode which Pico GFX 70 must use when the supply voltage is applied DEBOUNCE P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE y DEBOUNCE P BUTTONS RUN MODE CARD MODE Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 17 Activating RUN Mode If Pico GFX 70 displays RuN MopE v this means that Pico GFX 70 will start in Run mode when the supply voltage is applied 1 Otherwise select RUN MODE and press OK RUN mode is activated 2 Press ESC to return to the Status display Deactivating RUN Mode 1 Select RUN MopE ZV 2 Press OK The RUN mode function is deactivated The default s
318. value 0 to 3 There is therefore no display change between 3 and 7 Right numerical value The numerical value is inverted in the range from 0 to 3 and from 7 to 10 The upper limit value is set to 7 the display change occurs from numerical value 7 to 10 in the Display change tab and the lower limit value is set to 3 the display change occurs from numerical value 0 to 3 There is therefore no display change between 3 and 7 Figure 5 27 Display change via internal limit value comparison No display change Display change without 3 7s internal trigger Display change Display change without 3 7s Display Marker word1 C1 16 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 internal trigger Screen 8 Screen 8 shows an example of outputting a marker word The numerical value in the screen is associated with marker word MW01 The variable type is Word 6 57s 6 57s A value range from 0 to 999 is defined in the Number range format tab The timing relay T09 switches the counter C01 refer to the circuit diagram in PicoSoft Pro every two seconds The output QV of the counter function block writes the data to marker word MW01 defined in the Parameters tab in the Function block output area If the upper switch value SH 38 is reached the counter resets itself Overflow signal Timer 4 ms Underflow signal Counter 2 Visualization with Pico GFX 70
319. values Data function blocks A uset definable consistent data function block range can be operated with retentive actual values Timing relays A uset definable and consistent range for timing relays can be run with retentive actual values RUN MODE J A CARD MODE LIGHTING v RETENTION y MB 00 gt MB 00 A c 00 gt C 00 CH 00 gt CH 00 V B 200 Pico GFX 70 Settings 7 23 Requirements To make data retentive the relevant markers and function blocks must have been declared as retentive The data integrity of the memory is guaranteed for 101 read write cycles ATTENTION The retentive data is saved every time the power supply is switched off and read every time the device is switched on Setting Retentive Behavior Requirement Pico GFX 70 must be in STOP mode 1 Switch to the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is protected bya password the System menu will not be available until Pico GFX 70 is unlocked see Unlocking Pico GFX 70 on 7 5 The default setting of Pico GFX 70 is for no retentive actual value data to be selected When Pico GFX 70 is in STOP mode or has been switched to a de energized state all actual values are cleared 2 Switch to STOP mode 3 Switch to the System menu 4 Proceed to the SYSTEM menu and continue to the RETENTION menu 5 Press the OK button The first screen display is the selection of the marker range 6 Select a range u
320. vides four frequency counters which are CF01 to CF04 The frequency counters can be used for measuring frequencies You can enter upper and lower threshold values as comparison values The high speed frequency counters are hard wired to the digital inputs I1 to 14 The CE frequency counters operate independently of the cycle time Counter Frequency and Pulse Shape The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz The minimum counter frequency is 4 Hz The signals must be square waves The mark to space ratio is 1 1 Measurement Method The pulses on the input are counted for one second irrespective of the cycle time and the frequency is determined The result of the measurement is made available as a value to the function block output CF QV Wiring of a Counter The following assignment of the digital inputs apply e J1 counter input for the counter CF01 e 2 counter input for the counter CF02 e 3 counter input for the counter CF03 e 14 counter input for the counter CF04 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 76 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 CF01 gt SH gt SL QV gt Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Tanita T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Use a counter input for the CF CH CI counters only once Wiring of a Frequency Counter You integrate a frequency counter into your circuit in the form of a contact and coil The counter re
321. w Pico GFX 70 input and output signals are processed internally is explained in Delay Times for Inputs and Outputs on page 8 5 Even though the cursor buttons P buttons have been set as push button actuator inputs in the circuit diagram this function is not activated automatically This prevents any unauthorized use of the cursor buttons The P buttons can be activated in the System menu IMPORTANT If Pico GFX 70 is password protected you cannot open the System menu until you have unlocked it y y The P buttons are activated and deactivated via the P BUTTONS menu 1 Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu 2 Select the SYSTEM menu 3 Move to the cursor to the P BUTTONS menu Activating the P Buttons If Pico GFX 70 is displaying p Buttons Z this means that the P buttons are active 1 Otherwise select P BUTTONS and press OK Pico GFX 70 changes the display to p Burtons v and the P buttons are activated 2 Press ESC to return to the Status display The P buttons are only active in the Status display In this display you can use the P buttons to activate inputs in your circuit diagram Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 7 16 Pico GFX 70 Settings Startup Behavior Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Deactivating the P Buttons 1 Select P BUTTONS V 2 Press OK Pico GFX 70 changes the display to P Burtons and the P buttons are deactivated IMPORTANT The P buttons are a
322. ximum Visualization with Pico GFX 70 5 29 value range 9999 The value of QV will therefore jump to 9999 when the entered value is 10 00 and I1 is actuated Figure 5 29 Transfer of value with Allow digit selection set Value entry 10 00 QV value 9999 AlLLowdigit selec AlLLowdigit selec Set entry Set entry Qv OK Qv 0K 15 10 00 9999 10 00 Screen 4 Screen 4 shows an example of the Number range format tab particularly the Scaling range area and Input format area gt Fixed step width You can enter any value from 0 00 to 10 00 in step widths of 0 50 fixed step width After I1 closes the preset actual value SV is transferred When transferred the actual value QV switches to the SV value entered and continues counting from this value The maximum scaling range 10 00 is assigned to the maximum value range 9999 The value of QV will therefore jump to 9999 when the entered value is 10 00 and I1 is actuated Figure 5 30 Transfer of value with fixed step width set Value entry Transfer of QV value Step width Step width Set entry Set entry Qv 0K Qv 0K 16 8 50 8500 8 50 Screen 5 Screen 5 shows an example of the Visibility tab If I4 is closed the value entry element is made invisible The make contact bit logic is set When using break contact bit logic this is the same as a visible circuit Even when invisible the element is operable and value entry is still possible
323. xternal 500 Q resistor The following values apply e 4 mA 1 9V e 10 mA 4 8V e 20 mA 9 5V according to U R x I 478 Q x 10 mA 4 8V Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Installation 2 27 Connecting High Speed Counters and Frequency Generators High speed counter signals on the Pico GFX 70 can be counted correctly on inputs I1 to 14 independently of the cycle time Figure 2 29 High speed counter frequency generator LO1 LO2 L01 Ooo 24V OV OV 000 Connecting Incremental Encoders Inputs 11 12 and I3 14 on the Pico GFX 70 can each be used for the high speed counting of an incremental encoder independently of the cycle time The incremental encoder must generate two 24V dc square wave signals with a 90 phase shift between them Figure 2 30 Connecting incremental encoders LO1 LO2 L01 000 200 24V OV OV a l6 17 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 2 28 Installation Connecting the Outputs Connecting Relay Outputs Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 The Q outputs function inside the Pico GFX 70 as isolated contacts Figure 2 31 Output Q L The respective relay coils are actuated in the Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram via the output relays Q 01 to Q 04 or S
324. y Function of the Data Master Reset The outputs or the markers are set to the 0 state in accordance with the operating mode when a rising edge is detected on the trigger coil IMPORTANT The master reset function block should be used as the last function block in a program so that all data ranges are cleared reliably Otherwise subsequent function blocks may overwrite the data ranges The contacts MRO1Q1 to MR32Q1 assume the state of their own trigger coil Numerical Converters Pico GFX 70 provides 32 numerical converters NCO1 to NC32 A numerical converter function block enables you to convert BCD coded values to decimal values or decimal coded values to BCD coded values Wiring of a Numerical Converter A numerical converter in the circuit diagram only has the enable coil Figure 4 54 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with numerical converter T Sar sheed hte ese ek L NCO2EN Parameter display and parameter set for the numerical converter Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 124 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 NC02 Numerical converter function block number 02 BCD Convert BCD code to decimal value mode Appears in the parameter display gt l1 Input value OV gt Output value In the parameter display of a numerical converter you can change the mode and the enable of the parameter display Numerical Converter Modes Parameter Mode BCD Convert BCD coded values to decimal values
325. y invisible if 11 actuated make contact bit logic Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 5 14 Visualization with Pico GFX 70 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 Date and Time Example Program 2 Different Display Formats with Automatic Screen Change This program is a copy of the program Date and Time_manual screen switch e60 except that the screen change here is automatic The program consists of eight screens that can be activated in succession via the counter C01 The pulse signals are generated with timing relay T01 This produces the counter values 0 to 9 Counter value 1 activates screen 1 counter value 2 activates screen 2 etc If upper switch value SH 9 the counter resets itself This therefore produces a continuous loop The language setting for all eight screens is Deutsch Standard path C Program Files PicoSoft 6 Pro samples Program Date and Time_automatic screen change e60 Date and Time Example Program 3 Different Country Settings The program consists of 11 screens that can be activated automatically via the counter C01 The pulse signals are generated with timing relay T01 This produces the counter values 0 to 12 Counter value 1 activates screen 1 counter value 2 activates screen 2 etc If upper switch value SH 12 the counter resets itself This therefore produces a continuous loop Each screen contains a different country setting However this same WD DD MM YY format is shown
326. y to the outputs They are assigned as follows PWO01 gt Q1 PW02 gt Q2 IMPORTANT When using the pulse width modulation function block with a minimum on time of less than 1 s only use devices with transistor outputs The pulse width modulation function block is primarily used for outputting the manipulated variable of a PID controller The maximum frequency is 200 kHz This corresponds to a period duration of 5 ms The maximum period duration is 65 5 s Wiring a Pulse Width Modulation Function Block A pulse width modulation function block is integrated in the circuit diagram as a contact or coil MESIA T0 prevent unpredictable switching states use each coil of a relay once only in the circuit diagram Pwo2 gt SV gt ME Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 133 Figure 4 58 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with pulse width modulation Parameter Display and Parameter Set for Pulse Width Modulation PW02 Pulse width modulation function block number 02 Appears in the parameter display gt SV Manipulated variable input gt PD Period duration in ms gt ME Minimum on duration minimum off duration in ms The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify the period duration the minimum on time and the enabling of the parameter display Value and Time Ranges Parameter Value and time range Resolution SV 0 to 4095 1 digit PD 0 to 65535 m ME 0 to 65535 ms IMPO
327. you can use to set four on and off times The channels are set via the parameter display The time is backed up in the event of a power failure and continues to run although the time switch relays will no longer switch The contacts are kept open when de energized Refer to General on page A 1 for information on the buffer time Wiring of a 7 Day Time Switch A 7 day time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram as a contact HW14 A gt DY1 gt DY2 gt OFF Wiring with Pico GFX 70 4 107 Figure 4 45 Pico GFX 70 circuit diagram with 7 day time switch Parameter display and parameter set for the 7 day time switch HW HW14 7 day time switch function block number 14 A Time switch channel A Appears in the parameter display gt DY1 Day 1 gt DY2 Day 2 gt ON On time gt OFF Off time Channels 4 channels are available per time switch channels A B C and D These channels all act on the contact of the 7 day time switch Day 1 and Day 2 Hither the time period acts from day 1 to day 2 e g Monday to Friday or for one day only Monday MO Tuesday TU Wednesday WE Thursday TH Friday PR Saturday SA Sunday SU Time 00 00 to 23 59 Displaying the Parameter Set in the PARAMETERS Menu e Access enabled e Access disabled Contacts HW01Q1 to HW32Q1 Publication 1760 UM002B EN P March 2005 4 108 Wiring with Pico GFX 70 Public

1760-UM002B-EN-P, Pico GFX-70 Controllers User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents